2007 KIA Optima

GasolineUNLEADED gasoline AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higherFuel Tank Capacity16.4 gal. (62 liters)Recommended Engine OilAPI service SJ, SL or aboveILSAC GF-3 or aboveEngine Oil Capacity with Filter2.4L Engine : 4.5 US qt. (4.3 l)2.7L Engine : 4.7 US qt. (4.5 l)Engine Coolant2.4L Engine : 6.8~7.3 US qt. (6.4~6.9 l)2.7L Engine : 8.7~8.8 US qt. (8.2~8.3 l)Tire Pressure (measured cold)P205/60R16 : 30 psiP215/50R17 : 32 psiCompact SpareTire PressureT125/80D16 : 60 psiAutomatic Transaxle FluidDiamond ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III orother brands meeting the SP-III speci-fication approved by Kia Motors Corp.2.4L Engine : 8.2 US qt. (7.8 l)2.7L Engine : 10 US qt. (9.5 l)Brake Fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4Power Steering FluidPSF-IV

GAS STATION INFORMATION

kia, the company

Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner ofa Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about yourvehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”, “Who is Kia?”, “Whatdoes ‘Kia’ mean?”.Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea.It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on buildinghigh-quality vehicles at affordable prices. The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to theworld” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a,means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to comeup out of Asia to the world.”

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.When you require service, remember that your dealer knowsyour vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts andis dedicated to your complete satisfaction.Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.Kia offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models.Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along withthe various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your par-ticular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2007 Kia Motors America, Inc.All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated inwhole or in part without the written consent of Kia MotorsAmerica, Inc.Printed in Korea

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Knowing your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

Driving tips

In case of an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications

Consumer assistance (U.S. only)

table of contents

9

Index 10

1How to use this manual / 1-2

Vehicle break-in process / 1-2

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-3

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual.Especially, in order to minimize thechance of death or injury, you must readthe WARNING and CAUTION sectionsspread throughout the manual.Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, youlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. A goodplace to start is the index; it has an alpha-betical listing of all information in yourmanual.Sections: This manual has nine sectionsplus an index. Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-al. These were prepared to enhance yourpersonal safety.You should carefully readand follow ALL procedures and recom-mendations provided in theseWARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates a situation inwhich damage to your vehicle couldresult if the notice is ignored.

No special break-in period is needed. Byfollowing a few simple precautions for thefirst 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add tothe performance, economy and life ofyour vehicle.• Do not race the engine.• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.

• Avoid full-throttle starts.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious bodily injury or deathcould result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich personal injury, perhapssevere, could result if the caution isignored.

PROPOSITION 65 WARN-ING

Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

1 3

Introduction

Your Kia vehicle is equipped withmany high technology, electronicallycontrolled systems that help toensure your vehicle operates properlyand provides the performance thatyou expect. These systems utilizecomputers to monitor the operation ofvarious systems and components andhelp to control their operation. Thesecomputerized system operations arewide-ranging and involve componentsto reduce emissions, to continuouslyevaluate the readiness of the airbagand seatbelt pretensioner systems, todetermine when the airbag and seat-belt pretensioner systems should bedeployed and then to activate thedeployment, and if equipped, to oper-ate anti-lock braking, traction controland electrical stability control toassist the driver to control the vehiclein difficult driving situations. Thesesystems electronically store informa-tion that is useful to service techni-cians when they need to diagnose andrepair these systems.

Additional information is stored onlywhen a crash occurs that results inthe deployment of the airbags or seat-belt pretensioners. This type of datastorage is done by devices calledevent data recorders (EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag andseatbelt pretensioner computer sys-tem, known as the SupplementalRestraint System Control Module(SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit(ACU), may record some informationabout the condition of the vehicle andhow it was being operated. This infor-mation consists of data related toseatbelt usage and if there was diag-nostic information in the airbag orseatbelt systems at the time that acrash occurred, and if the ACUsensed that a crash of sufficientseverity occurred to require seat beltpretensioner or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, specialequipment is needed and access tothe vehicle or the device that storesthe data is required. Kia will notaccess information about a crashevent or share it with others except:• in response to an official request of

police or similar government office,or

• with the consent of the vehicleowner or, if the vehicle is leased,with the consent of the lessee, or

• as part Kia’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

Your rights with respect to the infor-mation discussed above may varyfrom state to state. In some states,such information is considered pri-vate, is exclusively owned by theowner of the motor vehicle, and is notretrievable or usable by another per-son or entity.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

2Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3Engine compartment / 2-4



22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button.....................3-10

2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*...............................................3-74

3. Power window switches* ...................3-13

4. Master power door lock control* .......3-11

5. Master power window control lock*...3-16

6. Steering wheel ..................................4-16

7. Hood release lever ...........................3-70

8. Trunk release lever* ..........................3-69

9. Fuel filler lid release button...............3-71

* : if equipped

OMG025001

2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s Air Bag .................................3-50

2. Light control / Turn signals ................4-42

3. Instrument cluster .............................4-24

4. Wiper/Washer....................................4-46

5. Ignition switch....................................4- 2

6. Digital clock.......................................3-93

7. Hazard...............................................4-48

8. Rear window defroster ......................4-48

9. Climate control system .............4-49/4-56

10. Shift lever....................................4-4/4-6

11. Cigar lighter.....................................3-90

12. Front passenger’s air bag ...............3-51

13. Glove box ........................................3-89

14. Seat.................................................3-17

15. Audio controls*................................3-99

* : if equipped

OMG025002


42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OMG075002

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-14

2. Engine oil filler cap............................7-13

3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-16

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-20

5. Fuse box ...........................................6- 8

6. Negative battery terminal ...........6-4/7-24

7. Positive battery terminal .............6-4/7-24

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick* ................7-18

9. Radiator cap......................................7-15

10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-13

11. Power steering fluid reservoir .........7-17

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-19* : if equipped

3

Keys / 3-2Remote keyless entry / 3-4Theft-alarm system / 3-6Immobilizer system / 3-8Door locks / 3-9Window / 3-13

Seat / 3-17Safety belts / 3-27Air bags-advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-47Trunk / 3-68Hood / 3-70Fuel filler lid / 3-71Mirrors / 3-74HOMELINK® Wireless Control System / 3-79Interior lights / 3-87Storage compartment / 3-88Interior features / 3-90Sunroof / 3-94Luggage net / 3-96Antenna / 3-97Audio remote control / 3-98Audio system / 3-99



23

The key code number is stamped on theplate attached to the key set. Should youlose your keys, this number will enablean authorized Kia dealer to duplicate thekeys easily. Remove the plate and store itin a safe place. Also, record the codenumber and keep it in a safe and handyplace, but not in the vehicle. Use onlyKia-approved key blanks.

Key operations(1) Master key

Used to start the engine, lock andunlock the doors, lock and unlock theglove box (if equipped), and open thetrunk.

(2) Transmitter (if equipped)Used to lock and unlock the doorsand trunk.

(3) Sub key (if equipped)Used only to start the engine and lockand unlock the door.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition keyLeaving children unattended in avehicle with the ignition key is dan-gerous even if the key is not in theignition. Children copy adults andthey could place the key in the igni-tion. The ignition key would enablechildren to operate power windowsor other controls, or even make thevehicle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or even death.Never leave the keys in your vehiclewith unsupervised children.

CAUTIONUse only Kia original parts for theignition key in your vehicle. If anaftermarket key is used, the ignitionswitch may not return to ON afterSTART. If this happens, the starterwill continue to operate causingdamage to the starter motor andpossible fire due to excessive cur-rent in the wiring.

OMG035108 OMG035109

1 2 3

3 3


Restrictions in handling keysWhen leaving keys with parking lot andvalet attendants, the following proce-dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunkand glove box compartment can not beopened in your absence.

With master and sub key(if equipped) 1. Open the trunk with the master key.2. Set the trunk lid lock knob in the trunk

to LOCK ( ) position. In the LOCK( ) position, the trunk can not beunlocked with either the trunk releaselever inside the car or trunk open but-ton of the transmitter.

3. Close the glove box, and lock the glovebox using the master key.

4. Leave the attendant with the sub key.The trunk and glove box are securedbecause the sub key only allowsengine start and door lock and unlock.

OMG035003


43

(1) Lock button(2) Unlock button(3) Trunk lid open button(4) Alarm button

(1) Lock ( )All doors are locked and hazard warn-ing lights flash once if the lock buttonis pressed.

(2) Unlock ( ) Driver’s door is unlocked and hazardwarning lights flash twice if the unlockbutton is pressed once. All doors areunlocked if the unlock button ispressed twice within 4 seconds.After pressing this button, thedoors will be locked automaticallyunless you open them within 30seconds.

(3) Trunk lid open ( , if equipped)The trunk lid opens if this button ispressed (more than 1 second).

(4) Alarm ( ) The horn sounds and hazard warninglights will flash for about 30 seconds ifthis button is pressed (more than 0.5second). To stop the horn and lights,press any button on the transmitter.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:• The ignition key is in ignition switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an author-ized Kia Dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEKeep the transmitter away from wateror any liquid. If the keyless entry systemis inoperative due to exposure to wateror liquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.

Operational distance may vary depend-ing upon the area the transmitter is usedin. For example, if the vehicle is parkednear police stations, government andpublic offices, broadcasting stations, mil-itary installations, airports, or transmit-ting towers, etc., these may interfere withthe signal.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG035004

123

4

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

3 5


Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centercover.

2. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, make surethe battery positive “+” symbol facesup as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

✽✽ NOTICEThe keyless entry system transmitter isdesigned to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction ifexposed to moisture or static electricity.If you are unsure how to use your trans-mitter or replace the battery, contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-ming.

✽✽ NOTICE• Using the wrong battery can cause the

transmitter to malfunction. Be sure touse the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it toheat or sunlight.

B070E01NF

HNF2005

HNF2006


63

Theft alarm system will not operate whenthe ignition key is in the ignition switch.If the lock button on the transmitter ispressed when the key is not in the igni-tion and any vehicle door or the trunk isopen, then, the doors will lock but thetheft alarm system will not activate.However, the theft alarm system willautomatically activate when the opendoor(s) or trunk is closed and locked.

Armed stageWhen the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”position, and key is not in the ignition, thesystem will be armed and the hazardlights will flash once when the followingconditions are met:• The hood, trunk and doors are all

closed and locked with the transmitteror ignition key.

• If a door or the trunk is not openedwithin approximately 30 seconds afterunlocking with the transmitter, all doorswill be locked again and theft alarmsystem armed.

If the “Lock” button pressed for more thantwo times within 3 seconds, the horn willsounds from the second time pressed.

Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the vehicle, the alarm maybe activated when the remaining pas-senger(s) leaves the vehicle.

Theft alarm stageThe alarm will activate (horn will soundand lights flash) when:• Any door is opened without using the

transmitter or key.• The trunk lid is opened without using

the key.• The engine hood is opened.

The alarm will sound ON for 27 seconds,then OFF for 10 seconds. This ON/OFFcycle will be repeated three times. Duringthis time, the engine will not start.

The engine will not start while thetheft-alarm system is armed or acti-vated. You must disarm the theft-alarm system to start the engine.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armedstage

Theft alarmstage

Disarmedstage

3 7


Opening the trunk with the alarmarmed (if equipped)When the alarm is armed, the alarm willnot sound if the trunk lid is opened withthe key.However, if the trunk lid is not openedcompletely within two seconds afterunlocking with the key, the alarm willsound.Also, if any of the doors or hood isopened while the trunk lid is open andthe alarm armed, the alarm will sound.

Disarmed stageIf the following conditions are met, thealarm system will be deactivated and thehazard flasher light will flash twice.• When the doors are unlocked with the

transmitter or ignition key.After depressing unlock button, youmust open the doors within 30 secondsor all doors will automatically lockagain and the theft-alarm system willbe armed.

• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

The alarm will be deactivated when:• The lock ( ), unlock ( ) button on

the transmitter is pressed.• The doors are unlocked with the igni-

tion key.• The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion for 30 seconds or more.

✽✽ NOTICEAvoid trying to start the engine whilethe alarm is activated. The vehicle start-ing motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage.


83

Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-tronic engine immobilizer system toreduce the risk of unauthorized vehicleuse.Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition key,and antenna coil in the key cylinder andICU (Immobilizer Control Unit) in thesteering shaft.With this system, whenever you insertyour ignition key into the ignition switchand turn it to ON, the antenna coil in theignition switch receives a signal from thetransponder in the ignition key and thensends the signal to the ECU (EngineControl Unit).The ECU checks the signal whether theignition key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep keysseparate to avoid immobilizer malfunc-tions.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transponder in your ignition key isan important part of the immobilizersystem. It is designed to give years oftroublefree service, however you shouldavoid exposure to moisture, static elec-tricity and rough handling.Immobilizer system malfunction couldoccur.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not change, alter or adjust the immo-bilizer system because it could cause theimmobilizer system to malfunction andshould only be serviced by an author-ized Kia dealer. Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe immobilizer system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION Do not put metal accessories nearthe key or ignition switch.The engine may not start for themetal accessories may interrupt thetransponder signal from normallytransmitting.

3 9





Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to

unlock and toward front of vehicle tolock.

• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-cle doors will lock automatically (ifequipped).

• Turn the key to the right once to unlockthe driver’s door and to the right twicewithin 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (ifequipped)

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter (ifequipped).

• Once the doors are unlocked, they maybe opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the doorfirmly by hand. Make sure that doorsare closed securely.

OMG035005

Lock

Unlock

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

DOOR LOCKS


103

To lock a door without the key, push theinside central door lock switch (1) to the“LOCK” position and close the door (2).

✽✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key, engagethe parking brake, close all windowsand lock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

Operating door locks from insidethe vehicleWith the door lock button• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button forward to the “Unlock” position(red mark on button visible).

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) forward to the “Lock” position. Ifthe door is locked properly, the redmark (2) on the door lock button willnot be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of front door ispulled when the door lock button is inlock position, the button is unlockedand door opens. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch anddoor is open.

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

• Lower the rear seats (ifequipped), move to the cargoarea and open the trunk using theemergency release handle (ifequipped).

OMG035007

Lock Unlock

OMG035006A

3 11


With central door lock switch(if equipped)• When pushing down on the front por-

tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill unlock.

• However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch and any front door is open, thedoors will not lock when the front por-tion of central door lock switch ispressed.

CAUTION - Doors • The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.

WARNING - Unlocked vehi-cles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

OMG035008

OMG035009

Driver’s door

Passenger’s door (if equipped)


123

Impact sensing door unlock sys-tem (if equipped)All doors will automatically unlock if a col-lision that warrants SRS air bag deploy-ment is detected when the ignition switchis in the ON position.However, if the impact causes damage tothe vehicle electrical system or themechanical door lock mechanisms, theimpact sensing door unlock system maynot operate.

Rear door child safety lockThe child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.

1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”position. When the child safety lock isin the “Lock ( )” position, rear doorwill not open when the inner door han-dle is pulled inside the vehicle.

3. Close the rear door.4. To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle.Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle (1) until rear door childsafety lock is unlocked ( ).

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed.To preventchildren from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear doorsafety locks should be used when-ever children are in the vehicle.

OMG035010

3 13


Power windows (if equipped)(1) Driver’s door power window switch(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch(3) Rear door (left) power window switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window*

(Driver’s window)(7) Power window lock switch*

• Power window timer*The power windows can be operatedfor approximately 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position. If the front dooris open, the window will not operateunless the ignition key is in the ONposition.

* : if equipped

WINDOWS

OMG035011

• Type A • Type B


143

Power windows (if equipped)The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power window switchthat controls that door’s window.However, the driver has a power windowlock switch which can block the operationof passenger windows.If you notice buffeting and pulsation(wind shock) with either side windowopen, you should open the opposite win-dow slightly to reduce the condition.

✽✽ NOTICE• To protect the power window system

from the possibility of damage, do notopen or close two windows at the sametime. This will also ensure the longevi-ty of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switchon the driver's door and the individ-ual door window switch in opposingdirections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and cannotbe opened or closed.

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle. To open or close awindow, press down (5) or pull up (5) thefront portion of the corresponding switch.

Automatic power window (driver’s window, if equipped)Type A - Automatic power window down Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detent posi-tion (6) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up the switch momentarilyto the opposite direction of the windowmovement.

OMG035012 OMG035013

3 15


Type B - Automatic power window (if equipped)

Depressing or pulling up the power win-dow switch momentarily to the seconddetent position (6) completely lowers orlifts the window even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up or depress the switchmomentarily to the opposite direction ofthe window movement.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected when the window operat-ing, the automatic power window systemmust be reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition key to ON position.2. Close each window and continue

pulling up on each power windowswitch for at least 1 second after thewindow is completely closed.

Automatic window reversal (When win-dow is closed by the automatic powerwindow)If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body,the window will detect the resistance andwill stop upward movement. The windowwill then lower approximately 8~12 inch-es (20~30 cm) to allow the object to becleared.

OMG035014 OMG035110

WARNING• The automatic window reversal

feature (window lowers 8~12inches (20~30 cm) when a resist-ance is detected) will only oper-ate when the automatic powerwindow operation feature is used.Automatic window reversal willnot operate if the window israised using the first detent posi-tion (5) on the power windowswitch or the window is raisedusing the second detent position(6) on the switch within 2 sec-onds after the window is loweredby the automatic window reversalfeature. Always double check tomake sure all faces, arms, handsand other obstructions are safelyout of the way of before operatingthe power window.

• If an object less than 0.15 inch (4mm) in diameter is caught betweenthe window glass and the upperwindow channel, the automaticreversal may not detect the resist-ance and will not operate.Therefore, always check for anyobstructions before raising anywindow.


163

Power window lock switch (if equipped)• The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on all passenger doorsby depressing the power window lockswitch located on the driver’s door toLOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switchis ON, the driver’s master controlcannot operate the passenger doorpower windows.

Curtain (if equipped)Use the rear curtain installed in the rearpackage shelf to shield the rear seat fromdirect sunlight through the rear window.Grasp the tab on the end (1) of the cur-tain and carefully pull it up to hook (2).

CAUTION - Windows• Always double-check to make

sure all arms, hands, heads andother obstructions are safely outof the way before closing a win-dow. Serious injury could occur.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep the dri-ver’s door power window lockswitch in the LOCK position(depressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by a child.

• Never extend face or arms out-side through the window openingwhile driving.

OMG035015 OMG035016

3 17


Driver’s seat(1) Forward / backward(2) Seatback recliner(3) Seat cushion, height*(4) Seat warmer*(5) Headrest

Front passenger seat(6) Forward / backward (7) Seatback recliner(8) Seat warmer*(9) Headrest

Rear seat(10) Split folding rear seat* (11) Armrest*(12) Headrest* ; if equipped

SEAT

OMG035017

Manual Type Manual Type

Electric type Electric type


183

Front seat adjustment (Manual type)Adjusting the seat forward and back-wardTo move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the desired position.3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the control knob. If the seat moves,it is not locked properly.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Loose objectsmight interfere with the seat slidemechanism. Do not place anythingunder the front seats.

WARNING - Seating posi-tion

In order to avoid unnecessary airbag injuries including the possibili-ty of severe injury or death, alwayssit as far back as possible by mov-ing the seat far back, while stillmaintaining good vehicle control.Serious injury or death may becaused due to the deployment ofthe passenger’s air bag.

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust seat while

the vehicle is moving. This couldresult in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright lap portion ofthe safety belt is snug and lowacross the hips. This puts yoursafety belts in the best position toprotect you in case of an acci-dent.

• In order to avoid unnecessary airbag injuries including the possi-bility of severe injury or death,always sit as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel so thatyour chest is at least 10 inches(250 mm) away from the steeringwheel.

OMG035018

3 19


Adjusting height of the driver’s seatcushion (if equipped)To change the height of the seat cushion:• Pivot the lever upward to raise the seat

cushion.• Pivot the lever downward to lower the

seat cushion.

Adjusting the seatback reclinerTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback to the desiredposition.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Driving or riding in a vehicle with afront seatback reclined could leadto serious or fatal injury in an acci-dent. If a front seat is reclined dur-ing an accident, the occupant’s hipsmay slide under the lap portion ofthe safety belt applying great forceto the unprotected abdomen orneck. Serious or fatal internalinjuries could result. The drivermust advise the front passenger tokeep the seatbacks in comfortablyupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.

OMG035019 OMG035020


203

Front seat adjustment (Electric type, if equipped)✽✽ NOTICE• Power seats are driven by the electric

motor. Stop operating if the adjust-ment is completed. Excessive opera-tion may damage the electrical equip-ment.

• When in operation, the power seatsconsume large amount of electricalpower. To prevent unnecessary charg-ing system drain, don’t adjust thepower seats longer than necessarywhile the engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more power seatcontrol buttons at the same time.Doing so may result in power seatmotor or electrical component mal-function.

Adjusting the seat forward and back-wardPush the control button forward or back-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the knob and the seatwill lock in the selected position.Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the control knob. If the seat moves,it is not locked properly.

Adjusting height of the driver’s seatcushion (if equipped)Move the front portion of the control knobup to raise or down to lower the front partof the seat cushion.Move the rear portion of the control knobup to raise or down to lower the rear partof the seat cushion.To raise or lower the seat cushion, pull upor push down on the center of the corre-sponding switch. Release the knob oncethe seat reaches to the desired position.

OMG035022 OMG035100

CAUTION - ChildrenThe power seats are operable withthe ignition OFF.This is another reason childrenshould never be left unattended inthe car.

3 21


Adjusting the seatback reclinerMove the lever forward or backward tothe desired angle and release the lever. Ifthe lever is released, seatback will lock inplace. After adjustment, make sure thatthe lever has returned to its originallocked position.

Warming the front seat (if equipped)The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch isON. When the switch is ON, a numberranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on theswitch (5 = warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set theswitch to 0.The seat warmer turns off automaticallywhen the seat temperature reaches theselected range and will turn on again ifthe temperature drops below the select-ed range.

OMG035023

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Driving or riding in a vehicle with afront seatback reclined could leadto serious or fatal injury in an acci-dent. If a front seat is reclined dur-ing an accident, the occupant’s hipsmay slide under the lap portion ofthe safety belt applying great forceto the unprotected abdomen orneck. Serious or fatal internalinjuries could result. The drivermust advise the front passenger tokeep the seatbacks in comfortablyupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.

OMG035024


223

✽✽ NOTICE• When cleaning the seats, do not use an

organic solvent such as thinner, ben-zene, alcohol or gasoline. Doing somay damage the surface of the heateror seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets, cush-ions or seat covers on the seats whilethe seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objectson seats equipped with seat warmers.Damage to the seat warming compo-nents could occur. Headrest adjustment

Adjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passengers, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3). Forbest protection, adjust the headrest so itscenter is as high as your ears. Alsoadjust the headrest so its distance fromthe head is as wide as your fist.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Passengers should use cautionwhen using seat warmers due tothe possibility of excess heating orburns. In particular, the driver mustexercise extreme care for the fol-lowing types of passengers:1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-

icapped persons, or hospital out-patients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)

OMG035025

3 23


Adjusting forward and backwardThe headrest may be adjusted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the headrestbackward, pull it fully forward to the far-thest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release lever (1)while pulling upward (2).

Rear seat Split folding rear seat (if equipped) The rear seatbacks fold forward to pro-vide additional cargo space and to pro-vide access to the cargo area.• To fold the rear seatback(s) down, pull

the lock release lever, then fold theseatback forward and down.

• To raise the seatback, lift and push itfirmly until it clicks into place.

• When you return the seatback to itsupright position, reposition the rearsafety belts so that they can be usedby rear seat passengers.

WARNING - Headrest posi-tioning

To reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, each occupant headrestmust be properly adjusted. Do notdrive the vehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly positioned.Do not adjust the driver's headrestwhile driving, or else loss of controland an accident is possible.

OMG035026 OMG035027


243

1. Slide the front seat forward, and movethe seatback to the forward position.

2. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-tion.

3. To retract the rear center seatbelt,insert the key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button (B)on the anchor connector. Pull up onthe seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically. (ifequipped)

4. Open the trunk lid.5. Pull the lock release lever (1).

6. Fold the seatback forward and downfirmly.

OMG035045 OMG035029

OMG035030

OMG035031

3 25


To unfold the rear seat:1. Lift and push the seatback backward

firmly until it clicks into place (1).2. Return the rear safety belt to the prop-

er position.

✽✽ NOTICEBe careful when loading cargo throughthe rear passenger seats to prevent dam-age to the vehicle interior.

OMG035033

1

OMG035042

(if equipped)

CAUTION • When returning the rear seat-

backs to the upright position,remember to return the rearshoulder belts to their properposition.

• Do not remove the floor carpet inyour vehicle. Emission controlsystem components cause highexhaust temperatures under thefloor.

WARNING - Cargo dangerCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown aboutthe vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

CAUTION - Loading proce-dure

Make sure the engine is off, thetransaxle is in P and the parkingbrake is applied whenever loadingor unloading cargo. Vehicle maymove if shift lever is inadvertentlymoved to another position with theengine on.


263

Armrest (if equipped)The armrest is located in the center ofthe rear seat. Pull the armrest down fromthe seatback.

Headrest adjustmentAdjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passengers, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3). Forbest protection, adjust the headrest so itscenter is as high as your ears. Alsoadjust the headrest so its distance fromthe head is as wide as your fist.

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release lever (1)while pulling upward (2).

OMG035035 OMG035036 OMG035037

WARNING - Rear headrestTo reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries to rear passengers, do notoperate the vehicle with the rearheadrest removed or improperlypositioned.

3 27


Pre-tensioner seat belt (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with driver's andfront passenger's pre-tensioner safetybelts. The purpose of the pre-tensioneris to make sure that excess slack is takenup in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners may activate along with thefront air bags in frontal collisions basedon angle of impact, seat belt usage andimpact severity.

The pre-tensioner seat belt isequipped at the front seats, and thesensor is equipped inside the buckle,where presence of passenger issensed by the fastening of the seatbelts. Therefore, pre-tensioner will notactivate if the passenger is not fas-tened with the seat belts. Likewise, itwill activate if buckled even without apassenger in the seat. Pre-tensionerseat belt is designed to activate whenthe seatbelt is in use. To ensure thepretensioner seatbelts activate inevent of a possible seatbelt buckleswitch malfunction, the system isdesigned to activate regardless ofwhether a seat belt is in use or if noseat belt use is detected within 6 sec-onds of turning the ignition switchON.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.(1) SRS air bag warning light(2) Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly(3) SRS air bag control module(4) Buckle pre-tensioner assembly

SAFETY BELTS

1KMB3311

1

2

34OMG035300


283

CAUTION - Air bag/Pre-tensioner dust

When the air bags and pre-tension-ers are activated, a loud noise maybe heard and fine dust, which mayappear to be smoke, may be visiblein the passenger compartment.Thisdust is not toxic. The dust maycause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods.Ventilate the vehicle after impactand wash your hands and face thor-oughly after an accident.

WARNING - Air bag/pre-tensioner warning light

If the SRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to “ON”, or if itremains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Kia deal-er inspect the pre-tensioner and airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING - Safety beltadjustment

To obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:• The safety belt must be worn cor-

rectly.• The safety belt must be adjusted

to the correct position.

WARNING - Replacingused pre-tensioners

• Pre-tensioners are designed tooperate once. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. All seat belts, of anytype, should always be replacedafter they have been worn duringa collision.

• Do not attempt to replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must bedone by an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Hot partsThe pre-tensioner assembies mech-anism becomes hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assembly for several min-utes after they have been activated.

WARNING - Damaging thepre-tensioners

• Do not hit or strike the pre-ten-sioner assemblies, especiallywith a tool or heavy object.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioners.

3 29


Safety belt restraint system We strongly recommend that the driverand all passengers be properlyrestrained at all times by using the safetybelts provided with the vehicle. Properuse of the safety belts decreases the riskof severe injury or death in accidents orsudden stops. In most states, and inCanada, the law requires their use.

All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertiallocks in the safety belt retractors allow allof the lap/shoulder safety belts to remainunlocked during normal vehicle opera-tion. This allows the occupants somefreedom of movement and increasedcomfort while using the safety belts. If aforce is applied to the vehicle, such as asudden stop, a sharp turn, or a collision,the safety belt retractors will automatical-ly lock the safety belts.

Since the inertial locks do not require acollision in order to lock up, you maybecome aware of the safety belts lockingwhile braking or going around sharp cor-ners.Always use the rear seat position(s) toinstall your child restraint(s).

The rear safety belts use a special auto-lock feature designed to allow a childrestraint to be used in these positionswithout an added locking clip. They nor-mally lock only under extreme or emer-gency conditions (emergency lockmode). However they can be adjusted sothat they remain fixed and locked when achild restraint system is placed in thesepositions. (Use this auto-lock mode onlyto secure a child restraint, never for pas-sengers restrained by the safety belts.)Page 3-42 gives instructions on placingthe safety belt in the auto lock mode.The drivers safety belt can only operatein the emergency lock mode.

WARNING - Safety beltsTo minimize the risk of serious orfatal injury in an accident, the driv-er and all passengers should usethe appropriate safety restraints fortheir age and size. The presence ofair bags does not change the needto be properly restrained by a safe-ty belt or size-appropriate childrestraint. In fact, air bags aredesigned to work the best whenpassengers are correctly restrainedin the vehicle.• Be sure you are familiar with the

information in this section,including the information oninfant and child restraints.

• Read the safety warnings on thesun visors of your vehicle also.

WARNING - Child restraintin front seat

Never install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger position,as an inflating air bag could causeserious or fatal injury to a child inthat position.


303

Safety belts provide the best restraintwhen:• The seatback is upright.• The occupant is sitting upright (not

slouched).• The lap belt is snug across the hips.• The shoulder belt is snug across the

chest.• The knees are straight forward.

(Continued)Failure to heed these warnings andfollow these instructions willincrease the risk and severity ofinjuries and the likelihood of deathin an accident.• Use the shoulder portion of the

safety belt on the outside shoul-der only.

• Never wear the shoulder portionof the safety belt under the out-side arm or behind the back.

• Never swing the safety beltaround your neck to fit over theinside shoulder.

• Never wear the shoulder portionof the safety belt across the neckor face.

• Wear the lap portion as low aspossible. Be sure that the lap beltfits snugly around the hips.Never wear a lap portion of alap/shoulder belt over your waist;it should always go over thestronger area of your hips.

• Never use a single safety belt formore than one person.

• The front seatbacks shouldalways remain in a comfortable,upright position when the vehicleis moving.

WARNING - After a collision• Lap/shoulder belt assemblies

may be stretched or damagedwhen subjected to the stress andforces of a collision.

• The entire restraint systemshould be inspected followingany collision. All belts, retractors,anchors and hardware damagedby a collision should be replacedbefore the vehicle is operatedagain.

WARNING - Cargo area (if equipped)

Passengers should never beallowed to ride in the cargo area ofa vehicle. No safety belts are pro-vided for the cargo area. Personsriding in the vehicle without a fas-tened safety belt are much morelikely to suffer serious bodily injuryor death during an accident.

WARNING - Twisted beltsA twisted or jammed safety beltcannot restrain you properly. If youcannot untwist or unjam the safetybelt, have an authorized Kia dealerservice it immediately. Never driveor ride with a twisted or jammedsafety belt.

WARNING - Belt useSafety belts must be used correctlyto work properly in an accident.Each seating position in your vehi-cle has a specific safety belt assem-bly that includes a buckle andtongue designed to be used togeth-er.

(Continued)

3 31


Safety belt warning light andchimeAs a reminder to the driver and passen-ger, safety belt warning light will blink forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch ON.If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when the key is turned ON or if it isdisconnected after the key is turn ON,the safety belt warning light will blink forapproximately 6 seconds.

If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when the key is turned ON or if it isdisconnected after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning chime will soundfor approximately 6 seconds. (if equipped)If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when you drive over 10 km/h, thesafety belt warning light and chime willactivate for six seconds. This cycle willrepeat 11 times with an interval of 24seconds between cycles.

WARNING - Safety beltcare

• A damaged belt may not give youthe protection you need in anaccident.

• Inspect your safety belts periodi-cally for excessive wear or dam-age. Pull out each belt fully andlook for fraying, cuts, burns orother damage. Pull the safety beltout and let it retract a number oftimes. Make sure that thelap/shoulder belts return smooth-ly and easily into the retractor.

• Check the latches to make surethey latch and release withoutinterference or delay.

• Never close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt.

• Any belt not in good condition orin good working order should bepromptly replaced.

CAUTIONNever close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt. It candamage the safety belt or bucklewhich could increase the risk ofinjury in case of an accident.

1GQA2083


323

Lap/shoulder beltTo fasten the front lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.

2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt outfrom the retractor.

3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into theopen end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicating thebelt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (1) of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THE HIPSas possible to reduce the risk of slidingunder it during an accident. Adjust thebelt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up onthe shoulder portion (2) of the safetybelt. The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automaticallyand to maintain tension on the belt. Foryour safety, do not put any excessslack into the safety belt at any loca-tion.

OMG035303OMG035302OMG035301

3 33


5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size. To raise the anchor position,push the anchor up (1). To lower theanchor position, press (2) the button(A) and slide the anchor down (3).After adjustment, make sure theanchor is locked in position.

If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck.

To unfasten the front lap/shoulderbelt:Press the release button on the buckleand allow the belt to slowly retract.

OMG035304OMG035038

WARNING• The height adjuster must be in

the locked position when thevehicle is moving.

• The misadjustment of height ofthe shoulder belt could reducethe effectiveness of the seat beltin a crash.


343

Rear lap/shoulder belt To fasten the rear lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out.3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the

open end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click’’ is heard, indicating thebelt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (1) of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THE HIPSas possible to reduce the risk of slidingunder it during an accident. Adjust thebelt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up onthe shoulder portion (2) of the safetybelt. The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automaticallyand to maintain tension on the belt. Foryour safety do not put any excessslack into the safety belt.

To unfasten: the rear lap/shoulder beltPress the release button on the buckleand allow the belt to slowly retract.

OMG035302 OMG035303 OMG035304

3 35


✽✽ NOTICEWhen returning the rear seatbacks tothe upright position, remember toreturn the rear shoulder belts to theirproper position. Routing the safety beltwebbing through the rear safety beltguides will help keep the belts frombeing trapped behind or under the seats.

3 Point rear center belt (if equipped) To fasten the rear center belt1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the

open end of the anchor connector (B)until an audible “click" is heard, indi-cating the latch is locked. Make surethe belt is not twisted.

2. Pull the tongue plate (C) and insert thetongue plate (C) into the open end ofthe buckle (D) until an audible “click” isheard, indicating the latch is locked.Make sure the belt is not twisted.

OMG035042

(if equipped)

OMG035041 OMG035043


363

There will be an audible “click” when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let youmove around. If there is a sudden stop orimpact, the belt will lock into position. Itwill also lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must beused.

WARNINGWhen using the rear seat centerbelt, you must lock all tongue platesand buckle/anchor connector. If anytongue plate or buckle/anchor con-nector is not locked, it will increasethe chance of injury or death in theevent of collision.

OMG035039

WARNING - Lock centerrear seat

• When using the rear center belt,you must lock all tongue platesand buckles prior to use. If anytongue plate or buckle is notlocked, it will increase the chanceof injury or death in the event ofcollision.

• The rear center seatbelt tongueplate (A) and anchor connector(B) should remain locked at alltimes. They should only beunlocked when folding the rearseatback down or when carryingan object in the rear seat thatcould cause damage to the seat-belt webbing or locking devices.In either case, lock the tongueplate (A) and anchor connector(B) immediately after unfoldingthe seatbacks or removing theobject being transported.

3 37


To unfasten the rear center belt 1. Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (C)from the buckle (D).

2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,insert the key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button (B)on the anchor connector. Pull up onthe seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically. (ifequipped)

Proper use and care of the safetybelt system To ensure that the safety belts providethe maximum protection, please followthese instructions:• Use the belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it

prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the belts.• Periodically inspect belt webbing,

anchors, buckles and all other parts forsigns of wear and damage. Replacedamaged, excessively worn or ques-tionable parts immediately.

• To clean the belt webbing, use a mildsoap solution recommended for clean-ing upholstery or carpets. Follow theinstructions provided with the soap.

OMG035044 OMG035045H


383

• Do not make modifications or additionsto the safety belt.

• After wearing a safety belt, make sureit fully retracts to the stowed position.Do not allow the belt to get caught inthe door when you close it.

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE.

Restraint of infants and smallchildren To increase their safety, infants andyoung children should always berestrained by a restraint systemapproved for their age and size.Never allow a child to stand or kneel onthe seat of a moving vehicle. Never allowa safety belt to be placed around both achild and an adult or around two childrenat the same time.It is best for children to be seated in therear seats.

Many companies manufacture childrestraint systems (often called childseats) for infants and small children. Anacceptable child restraint system mustalways satisfy U.S. Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards and your applicablestate laws. Make sure that any child-restraint system you use in your vehicleis labelled as complying with FederalSafety Standards.The child-restraint system should bechosen to fit both the size of the child andthe size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to fol-low any instructions provided by thechild-restraint system manufacturerwhen installing the child-restraint system.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomen wherethe fetus is located or above theabdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.

WARNING - Belt cleaningDo not bleach or dye the webbingbecause this may weaken the web-bing fibers and allow them to failwhen loaded in a collision.

3 39


Restraint of larger children As children grow, they may need to usenew child-restraint systems, includinglarger child seats or booster seats, whichare appropriate for their increased size.A child who has outgrown available child-restraint systems should use the beltsprovided in the vehicle. When seated inthe rear outboard seats, the child shouldbe restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available from inde-pendent manufacturers which help pullthe shoulder belt down and away fromthe child’s face or neck.

WARNING - Infants andyoung children

• Infants and young children are atmuch greater risk of seriousinjury or death in an accident orsudden stop if they are unre-strained or restrained improperly.Follow all instructions in this sec-tion and the instructions thatcame with an approved childsafety system. The child restraintmust be correctly installed in thevehicle, and the child must becorrectly placed in the childrestraint.

• All children under 12 are safest inthe back seat.

• Never install a rear facing infantseat in the front passenger posi-tion. The baby will be injured orkilled by the air bag if it deploys.

• Never allow a child to stand orkneel on the seat of a movingvehicle.

WARNING - Children onlaps

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms in a moving vehicle.Even a very strong person cannothold onto a child in the event ofeven a minor collision.

CAUTION - Hot metal partsSafety belts and seats can becomehot in a vehicle that has beenclosed during warm/hot weather;they could burn a child. Checkseats, seatbelt webbing and buck-les before you place a child any-where near them.

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is in motion.

• If safety belts are not properlyworn and adjusted, there is a riskof death or serious injury to sucha child.


403

Child restraint system For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is strongly rec-ommended and is required by law inalmost all states. This child seat or infantseat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.Children riding in the car should sit onthe rear seat and must always be proper-ly restrained to minimize the risk of injuryin an accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat.Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the childseat manufacturer when installing thechild restraint system.

1JBH3051

WARNING - Childrestraints

• A child restraint system must beplaced in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger’s seat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger air bag todeploy, it could severely injure orkill an infant or child seated in thefront seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Since a safety belt or child

restraint system can become veryhot if it is in a closed vehicle, besure to check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a childthere.

• When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the trunkor fasten it with a safety belt sothat it will not be thrown forwardin the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

• Children who are too large to bein a child restraint should sit inthe rear seat and be restrainedwith the available lap/shoulderbelts.

• When using the vehicleslap/shoulder safety belts, alwaysmake sure that the shoulder beltportion is positioned midway overthe shoulder, never across theneck or behind the back. The lapbelt portion of the lap/shoulderbelt must always be positioned aslow as possible on the child's hipsand as snug as possible.

(Continued)

3 41


Installing a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat,because of the danger that an inflat-ing passenger side air bag couldimpact the rear-facing child restraintand kill the child.Since all passenger safety belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), you mustmanually change these safety belts tothe auto lock mode to secure a childrestraint.

(Continued)• If the vehicle’s safety belt will not

properly fit the child, you mustuse an appropriate child restraintor booster seat in the rear.

• Never allow a child to stand up orkneel while the vehicle is moving.

• Never use an infant carrier orchild seat that "hooks" over aseatback. It will not provide ade-quate protection in an accident.

• Never allow a child to be heldwhile they are in a moving vehi-cle, as this could result in seriousinjury or death to the child in theevent of an accident or suddenstop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the childwith any protection during anaccident, even if the person hold-ing the child is wearing a seatbelt.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• Before installing the childrestraint system, read the instruc-tions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the safety belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediatelyby your authorized Kia dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual'sinstructions regarding childrestraint system and the instruc-tions provided with the childrestraint system could increasethe chance and/or severity ofinjury or death in an accident.


423

Placing a passenger safety beltinto the auto lock modeThe use of the auto lock mode willensure that the normal movement of thechild in the vehicle does not cause thesafety belt to be pulled out and loosenthe firmness of its hold on the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the following proce-dure.

Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the safety beltwebbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it iseasy to access in case of an emergency.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310

3 43


3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safetybelt all the way out. When the shoulderportion of the safety belt is fullyextended, it will shift the retractor tothe “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe safety belt to retract and listen foran audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”sound. This indicates that the retractoris in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on thechild restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the safety belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the safety belt and repeatsteps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attempting topull more of the safety belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the safety belt toretract fully.

"Click"

MMSA3029MMSA3028 MMSA3030


443

When the safety belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Auto Lock” mode to theemergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped) Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the shelf behind the rear seats.1. Open the tether anchor cover on the

shelf behind the rear seats.

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrest,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to thecorresponding hook holder and tightento secure the seat.

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.If the safety belt is not placed in the“Auto lock” mode, severe injury ordeath could occur to the childand/or other occupants in the vehi-cle in a collision, since the childrestraint will not be effectively heldin place.

2GHA3300

WARNING - Tether strapIf the tether strap is secured incor-rectly, the child restraint seat may notbe restrained properly in the event ofa collision. Do not mount more thanone child restraint seat to a tetheranchorage, since the anchorage canthen fail in a collision.

OMG035229N

3 45


Child seat lower anchorsSome child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asInternational Standards OrganizationFixed (ISOFIX) or ISOFIX-compatiblechild restraint seats. These seats includetwo rigid or webbing mounted attach-ments that connect to two ISOFIXanchors at specific seating positions inyour vehicle. This type of child restraintseat eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child seat in the rearseats.

There is a child restraint symbol locatedon the lower portion of each side of therear seatbacks. These symbols indicatethe position of the lower anchors for childrestraints so equipped.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-tem is secured by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or come awaycausing death or injury.

WARNING - Child restraintanchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

1JBA3157 OMG035046N


463

ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noISOFIX anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The ISOFIX anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seat cush-ion of the rear seat left and right outboardseating positions.Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tetheranchors. Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tilt theseat from side to side. Also try to tug theseat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

WARNING - ISOFIXAnchors

If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beingseriously injured or killed in a colli-sion greatly increases.

WARNING - ISOFIX loweranchors

ISOFIX lower anchors are only to beused with the left and right rear out-board seating positions. Neverattempt to attach an ISOFIXequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may fail andbreak in a collision.

WARNING When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.

OMG035046

3 47


AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1JBN3511A/OMGA035047/OMGA035048/OMGA035049/OMGA035051/OMGA035052/OMGA035053/OMGA035055/OMGA035054/1LDN2166/1LDN2167/1LDN2168

1 2 3

5

4

7

(1) Driver’s air bag(2) Front passenger’s air bag(3) Side air bag*(4) Curtain air bag*(5) SRS Control Module(6) Side impact sensor*(7) Front impact sensor(8) Front seat position sensor(9) Occupant classification system* : if equipped

986


483

What your air bag system doesDriver’s air bag and front passenger’s airbag are designed to supplement the pro-tection offered by the safety belt in cer-tain frontal collisions. Likewise, side airbags and curtain air bags are designedto supplement the protection offered bythe safety belt in side collisions. Safetybelts are designed to reduce the injury ofthe driver or passengers in case of lightimpact or collision. However, to helpreduce impact on driver or passengers ina serious collision, seat belts must alsobe worn correctly.

What your air bag system doesnot doThe air bag system is designed to sup-plement the protection offered by thesafety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUBSTI-TUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.

The importance of using safety beltsThere are four very important reasons touse safety belts even with an air bag sup-plemental restraint system. They:• help keep you in the proper position

(away from the air bag) when it inflates.• reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side

impact (vehicles not equipped withside and curtain air bags) or rearimpact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situa-tions and even a side curtain air bag isdesigned to inflate only in certain sideimpact collisions.

• reduce the risk of harm in frontal orside collisions which are not severeenough to actuate the air bag supple-mental restraint system.

• reduce the risk of being ejected fromyour vehicle.

Your vehicle’s Supplemental RestraintSystem Control Module is equippedwith a recording device that mayrecord the use or status of the safetybelt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

WARNING - Air bags &safety belts

• Even in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengers mustalways wear the safety belts pro-vided in order to minimize the riskand severity of injury in the eventof a collision or rollover.

• Always wear your safety belt. Itcan help keep you away from theair bags during heavy brakingjust before a collision. It may alsoreduce the risk of occupant ejec-tion.

• If occupants are not wearing safe-ty belts or correctly seated, theycannot be fully protected, andthus face a greater risk of seriousinjury or death.

(Continued)

3 49


Air bag system components The main components of your SRS are:• To indicate that your vehicle is

equipped with air bags, the correspon-ding air bag covers are marked with“SRS AIR BAG”.- Driver’s air bag- Front passenger’s air bag- Side air bag (if equipped)- Curtain air bag (if equipped)

• A diagnostic system that continuallymonitors the system operation.

• Air bag warning light to warn you of apossible problem with the system.

• Emergency power backup in case yourcar’s electrical system is disconnectedin a crash.

The SRS uses a collection of sensors togather information about the driver’s andfront passenger’s seat position, the dri-ver’s and front passenger’s safety beltusage and impact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seatposition sensors, which are installed onthe seat track let the air bag control mod-ule know where the seats are positioned.Similarly, the safety belt usage sensorsmeasure if the driver and front passen-ger’s safety belts are fastened. Thesesensors provide the ability to control theSRS deployment based on how close thedriver’s seat is to the steering wheel, howclose the passenger’s seat is to theinstrument panel, whether or not thesafety belts are fastened, and the severi-ty of the impact.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the air bag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided for mod-erate-severity impacts. A second stagelevel is provided for more severe impacts.According to the impact severity, seatingposition and safety belt usage, the SRSControl Module controls the air bag infla-tion.Failure to properly wear safety beltscan increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

(Continued)• Driver’s and front passenger’s air

bag are designed to inflate only incertain frontal collisions, and sideand curtain air bags are designedto inflate in certain side impacts.Frontal air bags are not designedto provide protection in sideimpacts, rear impacts, rollovers,or less severe frontal collisions.They will not provide protectionfrom later impacts in a multi-impact collision.

• If your vehicle has been subject-ed to flood conditions (e.g.soaked carpeting/standing wateron the floor of the vehicle, etc.) orif your vehicle has become flooddamaged in any way, do notattempt to start the vehicle or putthe key in the ignition. Have thevehicle towed to an authorizedKia dealer for inspection and nec-essary repairs.Disregarding this precaution maycause an unexpected air bagdeployment, which could result inserious personal injury or death.


503

Additionally, your SRS is equipped withan occupant classification system in thefront passenger’s seat. The occupantclassification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the front passen-ger’s seat and will turn off the front pas-senger’s air bag under certain conditionsin order to protect smaller front passen-ger seat occupants. For more detail, see“Occupant Classification System” later inthis section.

Driver’s air bag The driver’s air bag is stored in the cen-ter of the steering wheel.

WARNING - Seating sen-sors malfunction

If the seat position sensor is notworking properly, the air bag warn-ing light ( ) on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because the airbag warning light is connected withthe seat position sensor. If the airbag warning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position, if it remainsilluminated after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedKia dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

AIRBAG

WARNING - Seat usage• Modification to the seat structure

can damage the seat positionsensor and cause the air bag todeploy at a different level thanshould be provided.

• Do not place any objects under-neath the front seats since theycould damage the seat positionsensor or interfere with the occu-pant classification system.

• Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near thefront seat. These may cause amalfunction of the seat positionsensor.

• Have your car checked by a Kiadealer as soon as possible if theSRS warning light comes on.Ignoring the indicator light canresult in serious or fatal injury.

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-tion can provide incorrect data tothe occupant classification sys-tem and result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright in their seatswith their feet on the floor.

HLZ2120

OMGA035047

3 51


Front passenger’s air bag Front passenger’s air bag is stored in theinstrument panel on the glove box.Never put any objects or ornaments onthe instrument panel.

Occupant classification systemThe occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger’s seat and will turnoff the front passenger’s air bag undercertain conditions.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger’s air bag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.

WARNING - Steeringwheel

• You must always sit as far backfrom the steering wheel air bag aspossible (chest at least 10 inches(250 mm) away from the steeringwheel), while still maintaining acomfortable seating position forgood vehicle control, in order toreduce the risk of injury or deathin a collision.

• Never place objects over the airbag storage compartments orbetween the air bags and your-self. Due to the speed and force ofthe air bag inflation, such objectscould hit your body at high speedand cause severe bodily injuryand even death.

• Do not put stickers or ornamentson the steering wheel cover.These may interfere with thedeployment of the air bag.

OMGA035048

HLZ2121

1LDN2166


523

If there is no passenger in the front pas-senger seat or if the passenger in thefront passenger's seat is very small (suchas a child), the front PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator may go ON.When this indicator is ON, the front pas-senger's air bag will not deploy.The side air bag will not deploy if the frontseat is unoccupied.The side air bag may deploy if the frontseat is occupied by a small occupant.

Main components of occupantclassification system• A detection device located within the

front passenger seat cushion.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag systems(both front and side) should be activat-ed or deactivated.

• A warning light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates thewords “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicating the front passenger air bagsystem is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warninglight is interconnected with the occu-pant classification system.

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the safety belt.

• The OCS may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front

of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest-

ing them on other locations whichreduce the passenger weight on thefront seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seat back.

OMG035090N

3 53


• The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator illuminates after the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position orafter the engine is started. If the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by a verysmall person, the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator will remain illumi-nated and the front passenger air bagwill not deploy in frontal crashes. If thefront passenger’s seat is occupied byan adult size person seated properly,the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator will turn off after approximately 4seconds and the front passenger's airbag will deploy in frontal crashes.

• If the front passenger's seat is unoccu-pied, the “PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF” indicator will turn on, and thefront passenger's air bag will notdeploy in frontal crashes.

• If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator illuminates, the front passen-ger’s air bag will not deploy in frontalcrashes.

• If the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by an adult size person seatedproperly, the “PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF” indicator is not illuminated andthe front passenger’s air bag willdeploy in frontal crashes.

Condition detected bythe occupant classifi-

cation system

1. Adult *1

2. Child *2

3. Unoccupied

OffOnOn

OffOffOff

ActivatedDeactivatedDeactivated

"PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator light Air bag warning light

Front passenger airbag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1 The system detects a person who is generally of adult size as an adult, thus allowing the pas-senger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the systemmay detect as a child depending on his/her physique and sitting posture thus preventing airbag deployment.

*2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat,the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique sitting position,or objects in the lap of the occupant, thus permitting air bag deployment.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

CAUTIONIf the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks continu-ously when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's seat, it couldbe because that person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turnthe vehicle off, make sure the seat back is not reclined, have the passengercenter on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended, and the safetybelt properly positioned. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position long enough to allow the system to detect the person and acti-vate the passenger air bag.


543

CAUTIONIf the occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, the airbag warning light ( ) on theinstrument panel will illuminatebecause the passenger’s air bag isconnected with the occupant clas-sification system. If there is a mal-function of the occupant classifica-tion system, the "Passenger Air bagOff" indicator will not illuminate andthe front passenger's air bag willdeploy in frontal crashes even ifthere is child or no occupant in thefront passenger's seat.Have an authorized Kia dealerinspect the occupant classificationsystem with the SRS air bag systemas soon as possible if any of follow-ing occur;• The SRS air bag warning light

does not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to "ON" posi-tion.

• The SRS air bag warning lightremains illuminated after illumi-nating or blinking for approxi-mately 6 seconds.

• The SRS air bag warning light illu-minates while the vehicle is beingdriven.

AIRBAG

WARNING• The occupant classification sys-

tem can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" posi-tion.

• If a very low weight adult is seat-ed in the front passenger seat, theoccupant classification systemmay or may not turn off the rightfront passenger air bag, depend-ing upon the person's seatingposition and body type. Everyonein your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly -- whether ornot there is an air bag for that per-son.

• If the front seat passengerchanges their seating position(for example, by not sittingupright, by sitting on the edge ofthe seat, or by otherwise beingout of position), the "PassengerAir bag Off" indicator may beturned on, and the passenger's airbag may not deploy in a collision.Always be sure to sit properly inthe front passenger’s seat andwear the safety belt properly anddo not do any of the following.

(Continued)

WARNING - Children inrear seats

Even though your vehicle isequipped with the occupant classi-fication system, children aged 12and under should be seated in therear seats. Do not install a childrestraint system in the front pas-senger’s seat since a child restraintmay result in an improper readingby the occupant classification sen-sor. The infant/child could beseverely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an acci-dent.Children are afforded the most pro-tection in the event of an accidentwhen they are restrained by theproper restraint system in the rearseat.

3 55


(Continued)

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

(Continued)

1KMN3661

1KMN3662

(Continued)

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.(Continued)

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

(Continued)

- Never place feet on the dashboard.

- Always sit in a proper seating posi-tion.

(Continued)

1KMN3665

1KMN3666


563

✽✽ NOTICE• If luggage or other objects are placed

on the front passenger's seat or if thetemperature of the seat changes whilethe seat is unoccupied, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator mayblink. These conditions do not indi-cate a problem.

• Do not put heavy objects on the frontpassenger's seat. This may cause frontpassenger air bag deployment in theevent of an accident, thus increasingyour repair costs.

(Continued)• Manufacturers are required by

government regulations to pro-vide a contact point concerningmodifications to the vehicle forpersons with disabilities, whichmodifications may affect the vehi-cle’s advanced air bag system.That contact is Kia’s toll-freeCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-333-4KIA. However, Kia doesnot endorse nor will it supportany changes to any part or struc-ture of the vehicle that couldaffect the advanced air bag sys-tem, including the occupant clas-sification system. Specifically, thefront passenger seat, dashboardor door should not be replacedexcept by an authorized Kia deal-er using original Kia partsdesigned for this vehicle andmodel. Any other such replace-ment or modification couldadversely affect the operation ofthe occupant classification sys-tem and your advanced air bags.

(Continued)

(Continued) For the same reason, do notattach anything to the seat, dash-board or door, even temporarily. Ifthe system is adversely affected,it could cause severe personalinjuries or death in a collision.

• Do not place sharp objects on thefront passenger seat. These candamage the occupant classifica-tion system, if they puncture theseat cushion.

• Do not install accessory seat cov-ers on the front seats, since thesewill interfere with proper sensoroperation.

WARNING• The front seat passenger’s air bag

is much larger than the steeringwheel air bag and inflates withconsiderably more force. It canseriously hurt or kill a passengerwho is not in the proper positionand wearing the safety belt prop-erly. The front passengersshould always move their seat asfar back as practical and sit backin their seat.

• It is essential that the front pas-sengers always wear their safetybelts when vehicle is in motion,even when the vehicle is movingin a parking lot or up a drivewayinto garage.

• If the driver brakes the vehicleheavily in urgent situations, occu-pants will be thrown forward. Iffront passengers are not wearingthe safety belts, they will bedirectly in front of the air bagswhen inflation occurs. In that sit-uation, severe injury or death ispossible.

(Continued)

3 57


Side air bag (if equipped)Side air bags are stored in the left side ofthe driver’s seat and right side of the frontpassenger’s seat.If air bag inflation conditions are met(side collision), they will inflate.

(Continued)• Never allow front passengers to

put their hands, feet or face on orclose to the instrument panel. Inthe event of air bag deployment,such a mispositioned occupantwould be likely to suffer severeinjury or death.

• Never allow children, pregnantwomen or weak persons to sit inthe front passenger seat. Theymay be seriously injured by theair bag inflation when air bagdeploys.

• Do not use child restraint sys-tems on the front passenger'sseat, as inflation may cause deathor severe personal injury.

• Do not put objects or stickers onthe instrument panel. Do notapply any accessory on the frontwindshield glass and do notinstall aftermarket mirrors oraccessories on the factoryinstalled rearview mirror. Any ofthese could interfere with thedeployment of air bag inflation orcould hit your body at high speedand cause severe bodily injuryand even death.

WARNING - Seat covers,damage and modifications

• Do not use any accessory seatcovers for a vehicle equippedwith side air bags.Use of seat covers could interferewith side air bag deployment.If seat is damaged, have the vehi-cle checked and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer. Informthem that your vehicle isequipped with side air bags andan occupant detection system.

• Do not make modifications oradditions to the seats as they maycause the air bag system to mal-function resulting in severe per-sonal injury or death.

1JBA3901

OMGA035049/OMGA035050


583

Curtain air bag (if equipped)Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants and therear outboard seat occupants in certainside impact collisions.• The curtain air bag deployment occurs

only on the side of the vehicle affectedby the impact.

• The side air bags (side and/or curtainair bags) are not designed to deploy incollisions from the front or rear of thevehicle or in most rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only in certain side-impact colli-sions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and impact.

WARNING• In order for side air bags (side

and curtain air bags) to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants and both outboardrear occupants should sit in anupright position with the seatbelts properly fastened.Importantly, children should sit ina proper child restraint system inthe rear seat.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure to putthe child restraint system as faraway from the door side as possi-ble, and secure the child restraintsystem in a locked position.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side airbags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side curtainair bag system. This should onlybe done by an authorized Kiadealer.

• If a small child is seated on therear outboard seat cushion, it isprobable that they will below thedeployment level of the side cur-tain air bag and thus not protect-ed by that air bag.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result ininjury or death to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.

1JBA3900

OMG035051

3 59


Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditionsof the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich one or more of the air bagswould not be expected to provideadditional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impact acci-dents, as well as low speed impacts.Just because your vehicle is damagedand even if it is totally unusable, don’tbe surprised that the air bags did notinflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor (if equipped)

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

1JBA3512A/OMG035052/OMG035054/OMG035053/OMG035055

1 2 3


603

Air bag inflation conditionFront air bag Front air bags (driver’s and front passen-ger’s air bags) are designed to inflatewhen the impact is delivered to front col-lision sensors depending on the intensity,speed or angles of impact of the frontcollision - generally from an area a littleto the left to a little to the right of straightahead.

1JBA3513

WARNING - Protecting airbag module and sensors

• Do not hit or allow any heavyobjects to hit the locations whereair bags or sensors are installed.This may cause damage andunexpected air bag deployment,which could result in severe per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Body changes• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changeddue to the deformation of frontbumper, body or B pillar whereside collision sensors areinstalled. In the event of a colli-sion, have the vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designedto absorb impact and deploy theair bag(s) in certain collisions.Installing aftermarket bumperguards or replacing a bumperwith non-genuine parts mayadversely affect your vehiclescollision and air bag deploymentperformance.

3 61


Side air bags (if equipped)Side air bags (side and/or curtain airbags) are designed to inflate when animpact is detected by side collision sen-sors depending on the strength, speed orangles of impact of side impact of sideimpact collision or rollover.

Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags) are designedto inflate only in frontal collision, it mayinflate in any collision if front impact sen-sors detect a sufficient impact. Side airbags (side and/or curtain air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in side impactcollision, it may inflate in any collision ifside impact sensors detect a sufficientimpact.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roadsor sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or on sur-faces not designed for vehicle traffic toprevent unintended air bag deployment.To protect occupants, front air bags andpre-tensioner seat belts may deploy incertain side impact collisions.

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags aredesigned not to deploy in such casesbecause the risk of injuries which canbe caused by the air bags exceeds thebenefits they provide in protectingoccupants.

1JBA3514

1JBA3900

1JBA3515


623

• Frontal air bags are not designed toinflate in rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case, the airbags do not provide protection.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collision, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,and thus in side impacts, frontal air bagdeployment does not provide occupantprotection.However, side or curtain air bags mayinflate depending on the intensity, vehi-cle speed and angles of impact.

• In a slant or angled collision, the forceof impact may direct the occupants in adirection between the front and side airbags, and thus the sensors may notdeploy any air bags.

1JBB3520 1JBA3516 1JBA3521

3 63


• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly altered by such “under-ride” col-lisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-dents because air bag deploymentwould not provide proper protection tothe occupants.However, side air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision, if the vehicle isequipped with side air bags and cur-tain air bags.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point ofimpact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not trans-mitted to the sensors.

1JBA35181JBA3517 1JBA3522


643

Air bag system operation • Air bags only operate when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or STARTpositions.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event ofserious frontal or side collision (ifequipped with side air bag or curtainair bag) in order to help protect theoccupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single vehicle speed atwhich the air bags will inflate.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and the densi-ty and stiffness of the vehicles orobjects which your vehicle hits in thecollision. However, factors are not limit-ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is impossible for you to see the airbags inflate during an accident. It ismuch more likely that you will simplysee the deflated air bags hanging outof their storage compartments after thecollision.

• In order to help provide protection in asevere collision, the air bags mustinflate rapidly. The speed of air baginflation is a consequence of theextremely short time in which a collisionoccurs and the need to get the air bagbetween the occupant and the vehiclestructures before the occupant impactsthose structures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collisionand is thus a necessary part of air bagdesign.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruises andbroken bones, and sometimes moreserious injuries because the inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the steer-ing wheel air bag can cause fatalinjuries, especially if the occupantis positioned excessively close tothe steering wheel.

WARNING - Seated positioning

• To avoid severe personal injury ordeath caused by deploying airbags in a collision, the drivershould sit as far back from thesteering wheel air bag as possible(at least 10 inches (250 mm) away).The front passenger shouldalways move their seat as far backas possible and sit back in theirseat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in anevent of collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are not inproper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normally includefacial or bodily abrasions, injuriesby the broken glasses or burns bythe explosives.

3 65


Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal. After the air bag inflates,you may feel substantial discomfort inbreathing due to the contact of yourchest to both the safety belt and the airbag, as well as from breathing the smokeand powder. We strongly urge you toopen your doors and/or windows assoon as possible after impact in orderto reduce discomfort and prevent pro-longed exposure to the smoke andpowder.Though the smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin(eyes, nose and throat etc.). Wash andrinse with cold water immediately andconsult a doctor if symptoms persist.

Installing a child restraint on afront passenger seat is extremelydangerous and should never bedone.Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing severe or fatalinjuries.In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it may cause severe or fatalinjuries to the child.

WARNING - Hot air bagparts

When the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in steering wheeland/or instrument panel and/or inboth sides of the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors are veryhot. To prevent injury, do not touchthe air bag storage area’s internalcomponents immediately after anair bag has inflated.

1JBH3051


663

Air bag warning lightThe purpose of air bag warning light inyour instrument panel is to alert you of apotential problem with your air bag -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light should blink or illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds, thengo off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after the engine

starts.• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

Air bag (Supplemental RestraintSystem) service Your Supplemental Restraint System isvirtually maintenance-free. There are noparts which you can service.You must have the system servicedunder the following circumstances:• If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag

must be replaced. Do not try to removeor discard the air bag by yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Kiadealer.

• If the air bag warning indicator lightalerts you to a problem, have the airbag system checked as soon as possi-ble. Otherwise, your air bag systemmay be ineffective.

WARNING - Children • Never put a child in the front pas-

senger seat, even if they are in achild restraint. If the front passen-ger air bag inflates, it may causesevere or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats in which cur-tain air bags are equipped, besure to put the child restraint sys-tem as far away from the doorside as possible, and secure thechild restraint system to belocked in position.

AIRBAG

CAUTION - No modificationDo not modify any part of the air bagsystem. Modification could makethe air bag system ineffective orcould cause unnecessary deploy-ment.

3 67


Repairing or scrapping the vehicle• Repairing/replacing the steering

wheel, instrument panel, center con-sole headliner/pillar trim, or modifyingvehicle sheet metal components coulddisable the air bag system. Have suchrepairs and maintenance performed byan authorized Kia dealer.

• Special care must be taken in scrap-ping or junking an air bag-equippedvehicle. Always refer such activities toa qualified professional.

WARNING - No mainte-nance or repair

• Do not work on the air bag sys-tem’s components or wiring. Thiscould cause the air bags to inflateinadvertently, possibly seriouslyinjuring someone. Working on thesystem could also disable thesystem so that the air bags wouldnot deploy in a collision.

• Any work on the air bag system,such as removing, installing, orrepairing the steering wheel mustbe performed by a qualified Kiatechnician. Improper handling ofthe air bag system including thesteering wheel may result in seri-ous personal injury or death.

Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk ofair bag system.

2 (if equipped)

1JBN3519A/1MGA3055/OMG035103/OMG035113

1 3 (if equipped)


683

Outside the vehicle• To open the trunk, insert the key into

the lock and turn it to the right (clock-wise).

• To close the trunk, use both hands topush the trunk lid down. Check to seeif the trunk is completely shut.

Trunk room lampTrunk room lamp turns on when the trunkis opened. It remains on until the trunk issecurely closed.

✽✽ NOTICEMake sure to close the trunk securely. Ifit remains open while engine is not run-ning, it may cause battery dischargebecause trunk room lamp remains on.

TRUNK


Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

OMG035060N OMG035061

3 69


Inside the vehicleTo open the trunk from inside the vehicle,pull the trunk lid release lever.

Emergency trunk safety release(if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-gency trunk release cable located insidethe trunk. The lever glows in the darkwhen the trunk lid is closed. If someoneis inadvertently locked in the trunk,pulling this handle will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the trunk lid open,you will draw dangerous exhaustfumes into your vehicle causingserious injury or death to vehicleoccupants. Open trunk lids can alsodangerously obscure rear viewvision.If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, keep the air vents open sothat additional outside air comesinto the vehicle.

WARNINGNo one should be allowed to occu-py the trunk of the vehicle at anytime. If the trunk is partially or total-ly latched and the person is unableto get out, severe injury or deathcould occur due to lack of ventila-tion, exhaust fumes and rapid heatbuild-up, or because of exposure tocold weather conditions. The trunkis also a highly dangerous locationin the event of a crash because it isnot a protected occupant space butmerely a part of the vehicle’s crushzone.

CAUTION• If a person is locked in the trunk,

they can pull the emergencyrelease to open the trunk lid.

• We recommend that cars be keptlocked and keys be kept out ofthe reach of children, and thatparents teach their children aboutthe dangers of playing in trunks.

OMG035062 OMG035063


703

Trunk lid lock knob (if equipped)If the trunk lid lock knob (located near thelatch) is in the “LOCK ( )” positionwhen the trunk lid is closed, it will not bepossible to open the trunk lid by using theremote release. In this instance, use themaster key to unlock and open the trunklid. To allow the trunk lid to be openedwith the remote release, push the trunklid lock knob down, then to the oppositedirection of the “LOCK ( )” position.

Opening the hood:1. Pull the release lever on the lower left

side of the instrument panel to unlatchthe hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull the secondary latch(1) inside of the hood center and lift (2)the hood.

3. Raise the hood. It will raise completelyby itself after it has been raised abouthalfway.

OMG035003

HOOD

OMG035064 OMG035065

3 71


Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.Make sure the hood is properly lockedbefore driving.

FUEL FILLER LID

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

release button located on the driver’slower door.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap issecurely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-ly and make sure that it is securelyclosed.

CAUTION - Hood• Before closing the hood, make

sure that all engine parts andtools have been removed fromthe engine area and that no one’shands are near the hood opening.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

CAUTIONTo avoid injury from sharp edges, itis recommended that protectivegloves be worn if there is a need toopen the fuel filler door manually.

OMG035067OMG035066


723

WARNING - RefuelingIf pressurized fuel sprays out, it cancover your clothes or skin and thussubject you to the risk of fire andburns. Always remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the cap isventing fuel or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until the conditionstops before completely removingthe cap.

WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.• Before refueling note the location

of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.

(Continued)

(Continued)Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. Once refu-eling has begun, contact with thevehicle should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.Use only portable plastic fuelcontainers designed to carry andstore gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cellu-lar phones can potentially ignitefuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before startingthe engine.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe distanceaway from the fuel filler neck,nozzle, or other gas source.

• Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbing orsliding against any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior to refu-eling.

(Continued)

3 73


✽✽ NOTICE• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.• Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is

securely closed after refueling. A loosefuel filler cap may cause the “CheckEngine (Malfuntion indicator, )”light in the instrument panel to illumi-nate unnecessarily.

• If the fuel filler cap requires replace-ment, use only a genuine Kia cap orthe equivalent specified for your vehi-cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap canresult in a serious malfunction of thefuel system or emission control sys-tem.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior sur-faces of the vehicle. Any type of fuelspilled on painted surfaces may dam-age the paint.

When fuel filler lid does not openwith the release button1. Open the trunk.2. Pull the emergency hook for fuel filler

lid inside the trunk.

CHECKCHECK

(Continued)• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while at agas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel is high-ly flammable and can, when ignit-ed, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment or 911.

OMG035068


743

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles beforedriving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the control levers or remoteswitch, depending on the type of mirrorcontrol installed.The mirror heads can befolded back to prevent damage during anautomatic car wash or when passing in anarrow street.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not scrape ice off the mirror face;this may damage the surface of theglass. If ice should restrict movement ofthe mirror, do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, use a deicerspray, or a sponge or soft cloth with verywarm water.

Manual remote control (if equipped)To adjust an outside mirror, move thecontrol lever located at the forward insidearea of the window frame.

MIRRORS

CAUTION• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. Objects seen in themirror are closer than theyappear.

• Use your interior rearview mirroror direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

OMG035069

3 75


Electric remote control (if equipped)The electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. Toadjust the position of either mirror, movethe lever (1) to R or L to select the rightside mirror or the left side mirror, thenpress a corresponding point (▲) on themirror adjustment control to position theselected mirror up, down, left or right.After adjustment, put the lever into neu-tral position to prevent the inadvertentadjustment.

✽✽ NOTICE• The mirrors stop moving when they

reach the maximum adjusting angles,but the motor continues to operatewhile the switch is depressed. Do notdepress the switch longer than neces-sary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outsiderearview mirror by hands. Doing somay damage the parts.

Folding the outside rearview mirrorTo fold outside rearview mirror, grasp thehousing of mirror and then fold it back,toward the rear of the vehicle.

OMG035070 OMG035071


763

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isautomatically turned on when the rearwindow defroster is turned on. To heatthe outside rearview mirror glass, pushthe button for the rear window defroster.The rearview mirror heater (and rear win-dow defroster) will not operate unless theengine is running.The outside rearview mirror glass will beheated for defrosting or defogging andwill give you improved rear vision ininclement weather conditions. Push thebutton again to turn the heater off. Theoutside rearview mirror heater automati-cally turns off after 20 minutes.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)Adjust the rearview mirror to center onthe view through the rear window. Makethis adjustment before you start driving.

Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.Remember that you lose some rearviewclarity in the night position.

CAUTIONDo not place objects in the rear seator cargo area which would interferewith your vision out the rear window.

OMG035072

Day

Night

Day/Night lever

3 77


Electric type (if equipped)When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror. The sen-sor mounted in the mirror senses the lightlevel around the vehicle, and through achemical reaction, automatically controlsthe headlight glare from vehicles behindyou.Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallygo to the brightest setting in order toimprove the drivers view behind the vehi-cle.When the ignition switch is ON, the auto-matic- dimming function will turn on auto-matically.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as thatmay cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

Type ATo operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the ON/OFF button (1) to turn theautomatic- dimming function off. The mir-ror indicator light will turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) once againto turn the automatic- dimming functionon, the mirror indicator light will illumi-nate.

Type B - with compass (if equipped)To operate the electric rearview mirrorPush and hold the ON/OFF button (1) for3~6 seconds to activate the electricrearview mirror.Push and hold the ON/OFF button (1) for3~6 seconds once again to deactivatethe electric rearview mirror.

OMG035073 1KMA3084A

11

Indicator SensorIndicator Sensor


783

Type C - with homelink wireless control system (if equipped)To operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the I button (1) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function on. The mirrorindicator light will illuminate.Press the O button (2) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function off. The mirrorindicator light will turn off.

Type D - with compass and homelinkwireless control system (if equipped)To operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the ON/OFF button (1) to turn theautomatic- dimming function off. The mir-ror indicator light will turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) once againto turn the automatic- dimming functionon, the mirror indicator light will illumi-nate.

OVQ036025N

Indicator Sensor

B520C01MG

Indicator Sensor

3 79


Type AYour new mirror comes with an integrat-ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,which allows you to program the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate,home lighting, etc. The mirror actuallylearns the codes from your various exist-ing transmitters.

ProgrammingYour vehicle may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the ACC positionfor programming and/or operation ofHomeLink. It is also recommended that anew battery be replaced in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-ing and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency.Follow these steps to train yourHomeLink mirror:

HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem, you may be operating agarage door or gate operator.Make sure that people and objectsare out of the way of the movingdoor or gate to prevent potentialharm or damage.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature asrequired by federal safety stan-dards. (This includes any garagedoor opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982.) A garagedoor opener which cannot detectan object, signaling the door tostop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener with-out these features increases riskof serious injury or death. Formore information, call 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

• Retain the original transmitter forfuture programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchase). It isalso suggested that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink buttons be erased forsecurity purposes (follow step 1in the “Programming” portion ofthis text).

OVQ036305N

Glare detection sensorIndicator light

Homelink buttons


803

1. When programming the buttons for thefirst time, press and hold the left andcenter buttons ( , ) simultane-ously until the indicator light begins toflash after approximately 20 seconds.(This procedure erases the factory-setdefault codes. Do Not perform this stepto program additional hand-held trans-mitters.)

For non rolling code garage dooropeners, follow steps 2 - 3.For rolling code garage door openers,follow steps 2 - 6.For Canadian Programming, pleasefollow the Canadian Programmingsection.For help with determining whetheryour garage is non-rolling code orrolling code, please refer to thegarage door openers owner’s manualor contact HomeLink customer serv-ice at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on theHomeLink system you wish to trainand the button on the transmitter whilethe transmitter is approximately 1 to 3inches away from the mirror. Do notrelease the buttons until step 3 hasbeen completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, both but-tons may be released. (The rapid flash-ing light indicates successful program-ming of the new frequency signal.)

Some gate operators and garage dooropeners may require you to replacestep #3 with the “cycling” procedurenoted in the “Canadian Programming”section of this document.

OVQ036306N

Flashing

OVQ036307N

Flashing

1-3inc

hes

Transmitter

3 81


Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or otherrolling code equipped devices) with therolling code feature, follow these instruc-tions after completing the “Programming”portion of this text. (A second personmay make the following training proce-dures quicker & easier.) 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on

the device’s motor head unit. Exactlocation and color of the button mayvary by product brand. If there is diffi-culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-ton, reference the device’s owner’smanual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button on the device’s motorhead unit. You have 30 seconds tocomplete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand release the programmedHomeLink button up to three times.The rolling code equipped deviceshould now recognize the HomeLinksignal and activate when theHomeLink button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now beprogrammed if this has not previouslybeen done. Refer to the“Programming” portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activationwill now occur for the trained product(garage door, security system, entry doorlock, estate gate, or home or office light-ing). For convenience, the hand-heldtransmitter of the device may also beused at any time. The HomeLinkWireless Controls System (once pro-grammed) or the original hand-heldtransmitter may be used to activate thedevice (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,etc.). In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties, contact HomeLinkat 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Erasing programmed HomeLinkbuttonsTo erase the three programmed buttons(individual buttons cannot be erased):• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until the indi-cator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). Release both but-tons. Do not hold for longer than 30seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)mode and can be programmed at anytime.

OVQ036306N

Flashing


823

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink buttonTo program a device to HomeLink usinga HomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do NOT release until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inchesaway from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button (or press and “cycle” - asdescribed in “Canadian Programming”above).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The previous device has now beenerased and the new device can be acti-vated by pushing the HomeLink buttonthat has just been programmed. This pro-cedure will not affect any other pro-grammed HomeLink buttons.

Gate operator programming &Canadian programmingDuring programming, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press and hold theHomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4in the “Programming” portion of this text)while you press and re-press (“cycle”)your handheld transmitter every two sec-onds until the frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after several sec-onds upon successful training.

✽✽ NOTICEIf programming a garage door openeror gate, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the “cycling” process to preventpossible motor burn-up.

AccessoriesIf you would like additional information onthe HomeLink Wireless Control System,HomeLink compatible products, or topurchase other accessories such as theHomeLink® Lighting Package, pleasecontact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 oron the internet at www.homelink.com.




WARNINGThe HomeLink transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andDOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3

3 83


1. Channel 1 Button2. Channel 2 Button3. Status Indicator LED4. Channel 3 Button

Type B - Z-Nav™ IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless control sys-tem (if equipped)

The HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem provides a convenient way toreplace up to three hand-held radio-fre-quency (RF) transmitters with a singlebuilt-in device. This innovative feature willlearn the radio frequency codes of mostcurrent transmitters to operate devicessuch as gate operators, garage dooropeners, entry door locks, security sys-tems, even home lighting. Both standardand rolling code-equipped transmitterscan be programmed by following the out-lined procedures. Additional HomeLink®information can be found at: www.home-link.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RFdevice you are programming for use inother vehicles as well as for futureHomeLink® programming. It is also sug-gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons beerased for security purposes.

CAUTIONBefore programming HomeLink® toa garage door opener or gate oper-ator, make sure that people andobjects are out of the way of thedevice to prevent potential harm ordamage. Do not use HomeLink®with any garage door opener thatlacks the safety stop and reversefeatures as required by U.S. FederalSafety Standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). Agarage door that cannot detect anobject - signaling the door to stopand reverse - does not meet currentU.S. Federal Safety Standards.Using a garage door opener withoutthese features increases the risk ofserious injury or death.

B520C01MG


843

Programming HomeLink®• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park thevehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-tery be placed in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink® for quickertraining and accurate transmissionof the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the igni-tion switch to be turned to the sec-ond (or "accessories") position forprogramming and/or operation ofHomeLink.

• In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questionsafter following the programmingsteps listed below, contactHomeLink® at: www.homelink.comor 1-800-355-3515.

Standard programmingTo train most devices, follow theseinstructions:1. For first-time programming, press and

hold the two outside buttons,HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3Buttons, until the indicator light beginsto flash (after 20 seconds). Releaseboth buttons. Do not hold the buttonsfor longer than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) awayfrom the HomeLink® buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold boththe HomeLink® and hand-held trans-mitter button. DO NOT release the but-tons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttonsthe red Indicator Status LED will flashslowly and then rapidly afterHomeLink® successfully trains to thefrequency signal from the hand-heldtransmitter. Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe thered Status Indicator LED. If the indica-tor light stays on constantly, program-ming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the HomeLink®button is pressed and released.

6. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2through 5.

3 85


Rolling code programmingRolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996may be determined by the following:• Reference the device owner's manual

for verification.• The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver but does not activate thedevice.

• Press and hold the trained HomeLinkbutton. The device has the rolling codefeature if the indicator light flashes rap-idly and then turns solid after 2 sec-onds.

To train rolling code devices, follow theseinstructions:1. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe "learn" or "smart" button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color ofthe button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locat-ing the training button, reference thedevice owner's manual or please visitour Web site at www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or"smart" button (which activates the"training light").

There are 30 seconds in which to initi-ate step3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and then releasethe desired HomeLink® button.Repeat the "press/hold/release"sequence a second time to completethe programming. (Some devices mayrequire you to repeat this sequence athird time to complete the program-ming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe thered Status Indicator LED. If the indica-tor light stays on constantly, program-ming is complete and your deviceshould activate.

5. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow eithersteps 1 through 4 above for otherRolling Code devices or steps 2through 5 in Standard Programmingfor standard devices.

Gate operator & canadian program-mingDuring programming, your handheldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press the IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control Systembutton (note steps 2 through 4 in theStandard Programming portion of thisdocument) while you press and re-press("cycle") your handheld transmitter everytwo seconds until the frequency signalhas been learned. The indicator light willflash slowly and then rapidly after sever-al seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink®To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink® button.Activation will now occur for the traineddevice (i.e. garage door opener, gateoperator, security system, entry doorlock, home/office lighting, etc.). For con-venience, the hand-held transmitter ofthe device may also be used at any time.


863

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink® buttonTo program a new device to a previouslytrained HomeLink® button, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button. Do NOT releaseuntil step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehandheld transmitter 1 to 3 inchesaway from the HomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmit-ter button. The HomeLink® indicatorlight will flash, first slowly and then rap-idly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flashrapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe thered Status Indicator LED. If the indica-tor light stays on constantly, program-ming is complete and your new deviceshould activate.

Erasing HomeLink® buttonsIndividual buttons cannot be erased.However, to erase all three programmedbuttons:1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System is now in the training(learn) mode and can be programmed atany time following the appropriate stepsin the Programming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

This device complies with Part 15 FCCRules. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the GentexCorporation, Zeeland, Michigan.HomeLink® is a registered trademarkowned by Johnson Controls,Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

WARNINGThe transceiver has been testedand complies with FCC andIndustry Canada rules. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void theuser's authority to operate thedevice.

3 87


Map light (if equipped)The lights are turned ON or OFF bypressing the corresponding switch.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use the interior lights for extend-ed periods when engine is not running.It may cause battery discharge.

Dome light (if equipped)(1) OFF

: The light stays off even when a dooris open.

(2) DOOR: The light turns on when a door isopened or when a door is unlockedby the transmitter (if equipped).Interior light goes out slowly after 30seconds if the door is closed.However if the ignition switch is ONor all vehicle doors are locked whenthe door is closed, interior light willturn off even within 30 seconds.

(3) ON: The light turns on and stays on evenwhen the doors are all closed.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use the interior lights for extend-ed periods when engine is not running.It may cause battery discharge.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

OMG035077OMG035076


883

✽✽ NOTICE• To avoid possible theft, do not leave

valuables in the storage compartment.• Always keep the storage compartment

covers closed while driving. Do notattempt to place many items in thestorage compartment that the storagecompartment cover can not closesecurely.

Center console storageTo open either of the console storagecompartments, press button (1, ifequipped) or (2).These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror front passenger.

Multi box (if equipped)To open the cover, push the button andpull the cover down. It can be used forstoring small items.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

OMG035078

OMG035079

1

2

(if equipped)

OMG035080

3 89


Glove boxThe glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key (1, ifequipped).It cannot be locked/unlocked with the subkey (if equipped).To open the glove box, make sure it isunlocked, then pull the handle (2) and theglove box will automatically open (3).Close the glove box after use.

Sunglass holder (if equipped)A sunglass storage compartment is pro-vided on the overhead console. To openthe sunglass holder, press the cover andthe holder will slowly open. Place yoursunglasses in the compartment door withthe lenses facing out. Push to close.

CAUTIONDo not use the sunglass holderwhile driving. This could result inloss of control, and an accidentcausing serious injury or propertydamage.

CAUTIONMake sure the sunglass holder isclosed while driving to avoid headinjury in a collision.

CAUTIONTo reduce the risk of injury in caseof an accident or sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

OMG035081 OMG035082


903

Cigarette lighterTo use the cigarette lighter, press thefront face then release it to allow the cig-arette lighter and ashtray to slowlyextend from center panel.To operate the cigarette lighter, press it inand release it. When it is heated, it auto-matically pops out ready for use.If the engine is not running, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACC position forthe lighter to operate.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it will over-heat.

• Only a genuine Kia lighter should beused in the cigarette lighter socket.The use of plug-in accessories(shavers, hand-held vacuums, andcoffee pots, for example) may damagethe socket or cause electrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop out within30 seconds, remove it to prevent over-heating.

Ashtrays To use the ashtray, press the front faceand release it to allow the cigarettelighter and ashtray to slowly extend fromcenter panel.To remove the ashtray, grasp the ashtraybucket and carefully pull it out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in

an ashtray with other combustiblematerials may cause a fire.

OMG035083 OMG035084

3 91


Cup holderCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Front The cup holder can be used by lifting itscover.

Rear (if equipped)To use cup holders in rear seat, pulldown the rear seat armrest.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you could be burned.Such a burn to the driver couldcause a loss of control of thevehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or insecure bottles, glasses,cans, etc., in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion.

HNF2185OMG035085N


923

SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side windowshade, pull it downward, unsnap it fromthe bracket (1) and swing it to the side.To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and pull up the mirror cover (2, ifequipped).Pull the extension panel (3) of the sunvi-sor to lengthen the sunvisor.

✽✽ NOTICE• Close the vanity mirror cover securely

and return the sunvisor to its originalposition after use.

• If the vanity mirror lamp is equippedand mirror cover is not closed secure-ly, the lamp will stay on and couldresult in battery discharge.

Power socket (if equipped)The power outlets are designed to pro-vide power for mobile telephones orother devices designed to operate withvehicle electrical systems. The devicesshould draw less than 10 amps with theengine running.

OMG035087

OMG035088

OMG035089

Front

Rear

3 93


✽✽ NOTICE• Use the power outlet when the engine

is running, and remove a plug fromthe power outlet after using the elec-tric appliance. Using the power outletexcessively or while the engine is notrunning or leaving appliances pluggedinto the power outlet when not in usewill cause battery discharge

• Only use the electric appliances whichare less than 12V and 10A in electriccapacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater tothe lowest operation level when youhave to use the power socket whileusing air-conditioner or heater.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference when pluggedinto a vehicle’s power outlet. Thesedevices may cause excessive audiostatic and malfunctions in other elec-tronic systems or devices used in yourvehicle.

Digital clock (if equipped)Whenever the battery terminals or mem-ory fuse are disconnected, you mustreset the time.When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operatesas follows:

• HOUR:Pressing the “H” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by onehour.

• MINUTE:Pressing the “M” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by oneminute.

• RESET:To clear away minutes, press the “R”button with your finger, a pencil or sim-ilar object. Then the clock will be setprecisely on the hour.For example, if the “R” button ispressed while the time is between 9:01and 9:29, the display will be reset to9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 ➾ 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 ➾ 10:00

To change the 12 hour format to the 24hour format, press the “R” button formore than 5 seconds.For example, if the “R” button is pressedfor more than 5 seconds while the time is10:15 p.m., the display will be changed to22:15.

OMG035090


943

If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroofwith the sunroof control buttons locatedon the overhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not continue to press the sunroof

control button(s) after the sunroof isin the fully open, closed, or tilt posi-tion(s). Damage to the motor or sys-tem components could occur.

• The sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tiltedwhile in an open or slide position.

Sliding the sunroof Autoslide openTo use the autoslide feature, momentar-ily (more than 0.5 second) press theSLIDE OPEN ( ) button on the over-head console. The sunroof will slide allthe way open. To stop the sunroof slidingat any point, press any sunroof controlbutton.

Manual slide openPress the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button onthe overhead console for less than 0.5second.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the CLOSE( ) button on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

Tilting the sunroof Autotilt openTo use the autotilt feature, momentarily(more than 0.5 second) press the TILTUP ( ) button on the overhead con-sole. The sunroof will tilt all the way open.To stop the sunroof tilting at any point,press any sunroof control button.

Manual tilt openPress the TILT UP ( ) button on theoverhead console for less than 0.5 sec-ond.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the CLOSE( ) button on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG035092

3 95


Sunshade The sunshade will be opened with theglass panel automatically when the glasspanel is slid.You will have to close it man-ually if you want it closed.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not press any sunroof control but-

ton longer than necessary. Damage tothe motor or system componentscould occur.

• Periodically remove any dirt that mayaccumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof whenthe temperature is below freezing orwhen the sunroof is covered with snowor ice, the glass or the motor could bedamaged.

• The sunroof is made to slide togetherwith sunshade. Do not leave the sun-shade closed while the sunroof is open.

In case of an emergency If the sunroof does not open electrically:1. Open the sunglass holder.2. Remove the two (2) screws, and then

remove the overhead console.WARNING

• Do not extend face or arms out-side through the sunroof openingwhile driving.

• Make sure hand and face aresafely out of the way before clos-ing a sunroof.

OMG035093 OMG035094


963

3. Insert the emergency handle (providedwith the vehicle) and turn the handleclockwise to open or counterclockwiseto close.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use theemergency handle to operate the sun-roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-tem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-tion.

2. Set the sunroof to the maximum TILT-UP position using the correspondingsunroof switch.

3. Then, release it.4. Press and hold the TILT UP button

once again until the sunroof hasreturned to the original position of TILTUP after it is raised a little higher thanthe maximum TILT UP position. Thismay take several seconds.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem is reset.

To keep items from shifting in the trunk,you can use the four rings located in thetrunk to attach the cargo net.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not put fragile, bulky or an excessivequantity of items into luggage net. Theycould be damaged.

OMG035096

LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG035097

OMG035227

3 97


Fixed rod antenna (if equipped)Your car uses a fixed rod antenna toreceive both AM and FM broadcast sig-nals.This antenna is removable. To removethe antenna, turn it counterclockwise. Toinstall the antenna, turn it clockwise.

Glass antenna (if equipped)When the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the “ON”or “ACC” position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signalsthrough the antenna in the rear windowglass.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not clean the inside of the rear

window glass with a cleaner or use ascraper to remove the foreign depositsas this may cause damage to theantenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coating such asNi, Cd, and so on. These can disturbreceiving AM and FM broadcast sig-nals.

MMSA30761LDN3204

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-stretch the netting.ALWAYS keep face and body out ofrecoil path of the net, in case ofstrap.DO NOT use the luggage net whenstrap has visible signs of wear ordamage.

ANTENNA


983

The steering wheel audio remote controlbutton is installed to promote safe driv-ing.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not operate audio remote controlbuttons simultaneously.

MODEPress the MODE button to select Radio,Tape (if equipped) or CD (compact disc).

MUTE• Press the MUTE button to deactivate

the sound.• Once again press the MUTE button to

reactivate the sound.

VOL (▲/▼) • Press the VOL (▲) button to increase

volume.• Press the VOL (▼) button to decease

volume.

SEEK/PRESET (▲/▼) If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8second or more, it will work as follows ineach mode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

TAPE modeIt will function as the FF/REW button.

CDP modeIt will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC modeIt will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

If the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 0.8 second, it will work as follows ineach mode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the PRESET STATIONselect buttons.

TAPE modeIt will function as the AUTO MUSICSearch(AMS) button.

CDP modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons is described in the followingpages in this section.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG045080

OMG045080L

Type A

Type B

OMG045080C

OMG045081C

Type C

Type D

3 99


How car audio worksAM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves can fol-low the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmos-phere. In addition, they curve aroundobstructions so that they can provide bet-ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station. Also,FM signals are easily affected by build-ings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening con-ditions which might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. The fol-lowing conditions are normal and do notindicate radio trouble:

AUDIO SYSTEM

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM001

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢

JBM002 JBM003

FM reception AM reception FM radio station


1003

• Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, we suggest that you selectanother stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM004 JBM005

CAUTIONWhen using a communication sys-tem such a cellular phone or a radioset inside the vehicle, a separateexternal antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system and adverse-ly affect safe operation of the vehi-cle.

WARNINGDon’t use a cellular phone whenyou are driving. The driver muststop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

3 101


Care of cassette tapes (if equipped)• Because the thickness of a cassette

tape with the total playback time ofover 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, wesuggest that you do not use any ofthem to avoid having tapes being tan-gled.

• To achieve better sound quality, period-ically clean the tape head using a cot-ton stick with colorless alcohol (onceper month).

• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel bywinding with objects like a pencil.

• Because dust or foreign objects on acassette tape may damage the play-back head, always store tapes in theircases when not in use.

• Make sure cassette tapes are keptaway from magnetic devices (TV,stereo system, etc) in order to achievebetter sound quality.

• Be certain that no objects or substancesother than cassette tapes are insertedinto the cassette tape player.

• Because tape media can be distortedwhen exposed to direct sunlight, Donot leave cassette tapes on the seats,dashboard or near the back wind-shield.

Care of disc (if equipped)• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventilationbefore using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files withoutpermission(If equipped with M465, useonly MP3/WMA, If equipped with M445,use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are cre-ated only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such asbenzene and thinner, normal cleanersand magnetic sprays made for ana-logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs bythe edges or the edges of the centerhole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of softcloth before playback (wipe it from thecenter to the outside edge.)

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape or paperonto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter otherthan CDs are inserted into the CDplayer (Do not insert more than oneCD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operatenormally according to manufacturingcompanies or making and recordingmethods. In such circumstances, if youstill continue to use those CDs, theymay cause the malfunction of your caraudio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible Copy-ProtectedAudio CD

Some copy-protected CDs, which do notcomply with the international audio CDstandards(Red Book), may not play onyour car audio. Please note that if youtry to play copy protected CDs and theCD player of your car audio is not per-forming to your expectation, this may becaused by those CDs and not a defect inthe device itself. Please replace thoseCDs.


1023

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND(AM/FM) Select Button

3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. SCAN Button

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

MGM420NA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 103


1. POWER ON-OFF Control KnobThe radio unit may be operated when theignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion. Press the knob to switch the poweron. The LCD shows the radio frequencyin the radio mode, the tape direction indi-cator in the tape mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND SelectorBAND Selection Button Pressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands.

3. TUNE/MODE Select KnobRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select KnobPressing the MODE knob changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theMID, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TRE-BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).


1043

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

5. SCAN ButtonWhen you Press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCANbutton again.

6. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in the elec-tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM /FM select button and/or one of the sixstation select buttons, you may recall anyof these stations instantly.To program thestations, follow these steps:• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select buttonfor more than 0.8 seconds. A select but-ton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stationscan be programmed by selecting oneAM and two FM stations per button.

• When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM, FM1or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-tion button.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mech-anism may be damaged if you spillthem.

• Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could occur.

3 105


1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

2. TAPE EJECT Button

3. DOLBY Button

4. REPEAT(RPT) Button

5. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button

6. FF/REW Button

MGM420NA

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)


1063

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button• This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

• Push the TAPE button while the tape isin the tape deck, to turn on that func-tion without pushing Power ON-OFFcontrol knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. DOLBY ButtonIf you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)Button

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

• Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

6. FF/REW Button• Forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the FF buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

• Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.


3 107



2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob


5. CD SCAN Button

6. EQ Button


MGM445NA



1083

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in radio mode, and displaysthe CD track in CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.


2. BAND SelectorFM Selection Button Pressing the FM button changes theFM1 and FM2 bands.

AM(MW, LW) Selection Button Pressing the AM button selects the AMband. AM mode is displayed on the LCD.

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select KnobPressing the MODE knob changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting the each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.


MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theMID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-clockwise.






3 109


5. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you Press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.

6. EQ ButtonPress the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFFMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the displayas follows;



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select buttons and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow thesesteps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM station per button.





CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF


1103

1. CD Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. CD SCAN (BSM) Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

MGM445NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 111


1. CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you

press the CD button the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio player isbeing used.

• The CD player can be used when theignition switch is in either the “ON” or“ACC” position.

• Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-ized. Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using thetrack number.

• Press button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe track you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the or button.When you release the button, the com-pact disc player will resume playing.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thePower OFF then ON.

5. CD SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCAN button.• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

6. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)

7. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order.To use random, do the following:Press the RDM button to listen to record-ed tracks in random sequence. PressRDM again to cancel or turn the powerOFF then ON.The unit defaults to playingtracks in sequential order.


1123

✽✽ NOTICE• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

• When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capaci-ty.

• All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

• This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

• When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and CD) to water orexcessive moisture.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage tothe unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.



• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc to skip.Do not use the compact disc whendriving in such conditions as damageto the compact disc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.

• Avoid using recorded compact discs inyour audio unit. Original compactdiscs are recommended for bestresults.

3 113



2. AUDIO Select Button

3. BAND Select Button

4. CD SCAN Button

5. EQ Button


7. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control knob


MGM455NA



1143



the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the button to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode. Toswitch the power off, press the buttonagain.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingPower ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.




FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

4. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.




3 115


7.TUNE Select/Audio Control KnobRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing theAM/FM band select button and/or one ofthe six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. Toprogram the stations, follow these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select buttonfor more than 0.8 seconds. A select but-ton indicator will show in the display indi-cating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored in to thememory.You should then release the but-ton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations canbe programmed by selecting one AM andtwo FM station per button.



audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.



1163




4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button

7. EQ Button

MGM455NA


3 117








3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

















1183




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.




• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.





3 119


1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button


3. FF/REW Button



6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

7. SCROLL Button

8. EQ Button

9. CD EJECT Button

10. CD SCAN Button

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

MGM455NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M455) (IF EQUIPPED) - COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE


1203

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation or cassette tapeplayback.

• If you press the CD button while a discis in the CD deck, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.


• Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFF control knob.



• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3, AAC and WMA fileformats are supported. Load to playtime for these formats may be longerdue to the compressed nature of thesediscs.



• Press button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe file you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedfolder, press the RPT button for morethan 0.8 seconds. To cancel, press itagain. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order.To use random, do the following:• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON . (MP3 CD only)

3 121


6. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.(MP3CD only)

• Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play a bookmarked track, press theMARK button within 0.8 seconds andselect the bookmarked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, pressthe MARK button for more than 0.8seconds. The unit will beep once whenthe bookmark is erased.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored using the Bookmark func-tion will be automatically erased afteryou eject CDs that contain those tracks.

7. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check thefile names with more than 16 characterson MP3 CD(max 34 characters.).

The button doesn’t work on file nameswith less than 16 characters.


9. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)


each track, press the CD SCAN buttonmore than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.



1223




• All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.












• Avoid using recorded compact discs inyour audio unit. Original compactdiscs are recommended.

3 123



2. BAND Select Button

3. AUDIO Select Button

4. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob


6. CD SCAN Button

7. EQ Button

8. PRESET Station Select Buttons

MGM465NA



1243


the ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode orCD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switchthe power off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingPower ON-OFF control knob.


2. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

3. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode. The mode selected isshown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.






4. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.



6. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.

3 125





HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select button and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM station per button.







1263




4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button

7. EQ Button

MGM465NA


3 127








3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

















1283




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.









3 129


COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)- COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA

MGM465NA

1. LOAD Button

2. Playing CD Button

3. CD EJECT Button


5. SCROLL Button

6. FF/REW Button

7. EQ Button

8. CD SCAN Button

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button



12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

13. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button


1303

1. LOAD ButtonThis compact disc player will accommo-date up to six compact discs.To insert multiple discs into the player,perform the following:

1.Press and release the LOAD Button.2.Green light on the slot will be illuminat-

ed and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD,the slot will open with “INSERT” dis-played on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.

When the disc is inserted, the disc willbegin to play automatically.

✽✽ NOTICE• The disc can be only inserted while the

green light is blinking on the slot.• This CD player is suitable only for 12

cm discs, do not use irregular shapedCDs.

To insert multiple discs:

1.Press and hold the LOAD button forone second or more.You will then hear a beep sound andthe green light on the slot will be illumi-nated, and the numbers of empty discwill blink on the display.

2.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCDwith the lowest number of empty slotblinking, the slot will open with “INSERT”displayed on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbersof the empty disc will blink on the dis-play continuously.If the next “DISC NO.” is displayed whenthe slot is illuminated, you can then loadanother disc.

4.Load the remaining disc by followingprocedures 1 and 2. When you finishedloading 6 discs, the CD player willbegin to play the last CD loaded.

5.To load more than one disc but lessthan six, complete Steps 1 and 2.

When you have finished loading discs,press LOAD button to cancel the loadingfunction or wait for 10 seconds. The CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded. As each CD starts to play, theDISC number will appear on the display.

✽✽ NOTICEThe disc player takes up to six discs. Donot try to load more than six.

2. Playing CD Button• Press the CD Button to start CD play-

back, during radio operation or cas-sette tape playing.

• When discs are in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.


• Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3 and WMA file formatsare supported. Load to play time forthese formats may be longer due to thecompressed nature of these discs.

3 131




• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not playon this unit.

3. CD EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.• To eject all of the discs, press this but-

ton for one second or more.



• Press once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track.

• Press once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

• Press before playback begins toquickly move backward through a CD.

5. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check the filenames with more than 16 characters onMP3 CD(max 34 characters).The button doesn’t work on file namesless than 16 characters.

6. FF/REW ButtonIf you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.



each track, press the CD SCAN buttonmore than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.



1323

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.

• Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play the bookmarked tracks, pressthe MARK button within 0.8 secondsand select the bookmarked track toplay.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press theMARK button for more than 0.8 sec-onds. The unit will beep once when thebookmark is erased.

If you want to delete all tracks stored usingthe Bookmark function, press FILESEARCH Knob in the Mark Play mode formore than 0.8 seconds.You will hear a beepsound and all tracks will be deleted fromMark Memory with “MARK DELETE ALL”displayed on the LCD.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.


listening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedCD, press the RPT button for morethan 0.8 seconds.To cancel, press it again for more than0.8 seconds.

• To repeat the music within the current-ly played folder, press the RPT buttonfor more than 0.8 seconds.To cancel, press it again(MP3 CDonly).

• If you do not release RPT operationafter all the tracks are played back, theunit will play back again from the firsttrack.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

11. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential orderon one disc.

To use random, do the following:

• Press the RDM button to listen torecorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button• By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "

while CD changer is playing you canmove backward or forward to the nextdisc and playback automaticallybegins.

• If any of the slots do not contain a CD,your car audio will skip the empty slotand play only those that contain a CD.When switching CD’s, the LCD dis-plays the selected CD’s number.

3 133


13. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.




• Stored bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.












• Avoid using recorded compact discs inyour audio unit. Original compactdiscs are recommended.

4

Ignition switch / 4-2Starting the engine / 4-3Manual transaxle / 4-4Automatic transaxle / 4-6Brake system / 4-10Steering wheel / 4-16Cruise control system / 4-18Electronic stability control / 4-21

Instrument cluster / 4-24Gauges / 4-25Warnings and indicators / 4-30Compass / 4-36Rear parking assist system / 4-39Lighting / 4-42Wipers and washers / 4-46Defroster / 4-48Hazard warning flasher / 4-48Manual climate control system / 4-49Automatic climate control system / 4-56 Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-64



24

Illuminated ignition switchWhenever a door is opened, the ignitionswitch will be illuminated for your con-venience, provided the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.The light will go offapproximately 10 seconds after closingthe door or when the ignition switch isturned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position (manual transaxle).

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

ONThis is the normal running position afterthe engine is started. The warning lightscan be checked before the engine isstarted.Do not leave the ignition switch ON if theengine is not running to prevent batterydischarge.

STARTTurn the ignition key to the START posi-tion to start the engine. The engine willcrank until you release the key; then itreturns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.

✽✽ NOTICEIf it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe START position, turn the steeringwheel right and left to release resistanceand then turn the key.

Automatic transaxleWhen turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, the shift lever must be inthe P (Park) position.

IGNITION SWITCH

OMG045001 OMG045002

4 3


STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress theclutch pedal fully and shift thetransaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutchpedal depressed while turning theignition switch to the start position.The starter will not operate if theclutch pedal is not fully depressed.Automatic Transaxle - Place thetransaxle shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below 0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days, letthe engine warm up without depress-ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressingthe accelerator.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not engage the starter for more than10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails tostart, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Excessive orimproper use of the starter may damageit.

The starter will not operate if:• Manual Transaxle - the clutch pedal is

not fully depressed.• Automatic Transaxle - the shift lever

is NOT in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving. This would result in lossof directional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident or collision.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris engaged in 1st gear for manualtransaxle or P (Park) for automat-ic transaxle. Then, set the parkingbrake fully and shut the engineoff. Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignitionswitch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is in motion. The pres-ence of your hand or arm in thisarea could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol, an accident and seriousbodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to anaccident.

CAUTION - StallIf the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoes whenoperating your vehicle. Unsuitableshoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) mayinterfere with your ability to use thebrake and accelerator pedal, and theclutch (if equipped).


44

Manual transaxle operationThe manual transaxle has five forwardgears.Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, then release it slowly.The gearshift lever must be returned tothe neutral position before shifting into R(Reverse). The ring located immediatelybelow the shift knob must be pulledupward while moving the shift lever to theR position.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into R (Reverse).Never operate the engine with thetachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be taken notto inadvertently press the gear shiftlever sideways in such a manner thatsecond gear is engaged. Such a drasticdownshift may cause the engine speed toincrease to the point that the tachometerwill enter the red-zone. Such over-revving of the engine may possibly causeengine damage.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG045003N

The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can be moved without pulling the ring (1).

1

4 5


• To shift into reverse, rest the lever inneutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

• During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and notharmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down, and then shiftinto 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.

✽✽ NOTICETo avoid premature clutch wear anddamage, do not drive with your footresting on the clutch pedal. Also, don’tuse the clutch to hold the vehiclestopped on an uphill grade, while wait-ing for a traffic light, etc.

DownshiftingWhen you must slow down in heavy traf-fic or while driving up steep hills, down-shift before the engine starts to labor.Downshifting reduces the chance ofstalling and gives better accelerationwhen you again need to increase yourspeed. When the vehicle is travelingdown steep hills, downshifting helpsmaintain safe speed and prolongs brakelife.

WARNING - Manualtransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always set the parking brake fullyand shut the engine off. Then makesure the transaxle is shifted into 1st

gear when the vehicle is parked ona level or uphill grade, and shiftedinto R (Reverse) on a downhillgrade. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifthese precautions are not followedin the order identified.


64

Automatic transaxle operationAll normal forward driving is done withthe shift lever in the D (Drive) position.To move the shift lever from the P (Park)position, the brake pedal must bedepressed.

For smooth operation, depress the brakepedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to aforward or reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift lever isin the P (PARK) position; then setthe parking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifthese precautions are not followedin the order identified.

OMG045004

Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.

The shift lever can be moved freely.

4 7


✽✽ NOTICE• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do

not accelerate the engine in R(Reverse) or any forward gear posi-tion with the brakes on.

• When stopped on an uphill grade, donot hold the vehicle stationary withengine power. Use the service brakeor the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P(Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse)when the engine is above idle speed.

Transaxle rangesP (Park)This position locks the transaxle and pre-vents the front wheels from rotating.Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into this position.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transaxle may be damaged if youshift into P (Park) while the vehicle is inmotion.

R (Reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways come to a complete stop beforeshifting into or out of R (Reverse); youmay damage the transaxle if you shiftinto R while the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)• Do not use the P (Park) position in

place of the parking brake.Always make sure the shift leveris latched in the P (Park) positionAND set the parking brake fully.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (Park) position. Set theparking brake fully, shut theengine off and take the key withyou. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifyou do not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattended ina vehicle.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

• Shifting into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion will cause thedrive wheels to lock which willcause you to lose control of thevehicle.

(Continued)


84

N (Neutral)With the gearshift in the N position, thewheels and transaxle are not locked. Thevehicle will roll freely even on the slight-est incline unless the parking brake orservice brakes are applied.

D (Drive)This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transaxle will automatically shiftthrough a 5-gear sequence, providing thebest fuel economy and power.For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time thetransaxle will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear.

Sports modeWhether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the “D” positioninto the manual gate. To return to “D”range operation, push the shift lever backinto the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transaxle, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-): Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICE• Upshifts do not take place automati-

cally in sports mode. The driver mustexecute upshifts in accordance withroad conditions, taking care to keepthe engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the five forwardgears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the “R” or “P” position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpmapproaches the red zone shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the shift lever is oper-ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into 2nd gear whichis better for smooth driving on a slip-pery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to 1st gear.

OMG045005

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Automatic mode

Sports mode

4 9


Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2 (Second Gear) whilein Sport mode will help prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards.

Ignition key interlock systemThe ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position. If the ignition switch is in anyother position, the key cannot beremoved.

Shift lock systemFor your safety, the Automatic Transaxlehas a shift lock system which preventsshifting the transaxle out of P (Park)unless the brake pedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ON position.3. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringsound near the shift lever may be heard.This is a normal condition.

Shift-lock overrideIf the shift lever should fail to move fromthe P (Park) position with the brake pedaldepressed, continue depressing thebrake, then do the following:1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

S/Lock override access hole which islocated on the right side of the shiftlever.

2. Insert the screwdriver or key into theaccess hole and press down on thekey.

3. Depress the lock release button andmove the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealership immediately.

OMG045061


104

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would. The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Parking brakePulling the parking brake while thevehicle is moving at normal speedscan cause a sudden loss of controlof the vehicle. If you must use theparking brake to stop the vehicle,use great caution in applying thebrake.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

• When descending a long or steephill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-cle not slowing down at the usualrate and pulling to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Aftergoing through water, apply thebrakes lightly to regain smoothbraking performance.

4 11


Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn and it'stime for new pads, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your frontbrakes or rear brakes (if equipped). Youmay hear this sound come and go or itmay occur whenever you depress thebrake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

✽✽ NOTICETo avoid costly brake repairs, do notcontinue to drive with worn brake pads.

Power adjustable pedals (if equipped)To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, turn the ignition key tothe “ON” position with the selector leverin the "P" position and push the switch.

If you push the “▲” portion of the switch,the pedals move rearward.If you push the “▼” portion of the switch,the pedals move forward.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads as com-plete front or rear axle sets toensure smooth brake performance.

OMG045077


124

Setting the driver's position1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-

als to the front most position by push-ing the “▼” portion of the switch.

3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4. Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the “▲” portion of the switch.

5. Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the feel after adjusting.

Parking brake To engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then without pressingthe release button in, pull the parkingbrake lever up as far as possible. In addi-tion it is recommended that when parkingthe vehicle on a gtadient, the shift levershould be positioned in the appropriatelow gear on manual transaxle vehicles orin the P(Park) position on automatictransaxle vehicles.

✽✽ NOTICEDriving with the parking brake appliedwill cause excessive brake pad (or lin-ing) and brake rotor wear.

WARNING - Pedal adjust-ment

• Adjust the pedals after parkingthe vehicle on level ground. Neverattempt to adjust the pedals whilethe vehicle is moving.

• Never adjust the pedals with yourfoot on the accelerator pedal asthis may result in increasing theengine speed and acceleration.

• Make sure that you can fullydepress the brake pedal beforedriving. Otherwise, you may notbe able to hold down the brakepedal firmly in an emergencystop.

OMG045006

4 13


To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull the parking leverslightly.Secondly, depress the release buttonand lower the parking brake lever whileholding the button.

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminatedwhen the parking brake is applied withthe ignition switch in the START or ONposition.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released, theremay be a malfunction in the brake sys-tem. Immediate attention is necessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-tion or repair shop.

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use thegearshift lever in place of theparking brake. Set the parkingbrake AND make sure thegearshift lever is securely posi-tioned in 1st (First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transaxleequipped vehicles and in P (Park)for automatic transaxle equippedvehicles.

• Never allow a person who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle or childrento touch the parking brake. If theparking brake is released unin-tentionally, serious injury mayoccur.

W-75OMG045007


144

Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an uphill

grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelsaway from the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves backward.

• When parking your vehicle on a down-hill grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelstoward the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves forward.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)

The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS repeatedly modulates thehydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situation,do not attempt to modulate your brakepressure and do not try to pump yourbrakes. Press your brake pedal as hardas possible or as hard as the situationwarrants and allow the ABS to control theforce being delivered to the brakes.• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

WARNING - ABS BrakesYour ABS is not a substitute forgood driving judgement. You canstill have an accident. In fact, yourABS will probably not be able toprevent an accident in the followingdriving conditions:• Dangerous driving, such as

neglecting safety precautions,speeding, or driving too close tothe vehicle in front of you.

• Driving at high speed in situa-tions providing considerably lesstraction, such as wet conditionswhere hydroplaning could occur.

• Driving too fast on poor road sur-faces. The ABS is designed toimprove maximum braking effec-tiveness on typical highways androads in good condition. On poorroad surfaces, the ABS may actu-ally reduce braking effectiveness.

4 15


✽✽ NOTICE• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problemwith the ABS. In this case, however,your regular brakes will work nor-mally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on forapproximately 3 seconds after theignition switch is ON. During thattime, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off ifeverything is normal. If the light stayson, you may have a problem with yourABS. Contact an authorized Kia deal-er as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICE• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road, andoperate your brakes continuously, theABS will be active continuously andthe ABS warning light may illuminate.Pull your car over to a safe place andstop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS warn-ing light is off, then your ABS is nor-mal. Otherwise, you may have a prob-lem with the ABS. Contact an author-ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the enginemay not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of the lowbattery voltage. It does not mean yourABS is malfunctioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

ABS

W-78


164

Power steering (if equipped)Power steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering the vehi-cle. If the engine is off or if the powersteering system becomes inoperative,the vehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• Never hold the steering wheel against

a stop (extreme right or left turn) formore than 5 seconds with the enginerunning. Holding the steering wheelfor more than 5 seconds in either posi-tion may cause damage to the powersteering pump.

• If the power steering drive belt breaksor if the power steering pump mal-functions, the steering effort willgreatly increase.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather (below14 °F/-10 °C), the power steering mayrequire increased effort when the engineis first started. This is caused byincreased fluid viscosity due to the coldweather and does not indicate a mal-function.When this happens, increase the engineRPM by depressing the accelerator untilthe RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then releaseor let the engine idle for two or threeminutes to warm up the fluid.

Tilt and telescopic steering (if equipped)A tilt and telescopic steering wheelallows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive.You can also raise it tothe highest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter the vehi-cle.

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING - Steering wheel • Never adjust the angle of steering

wheel while driving.You may loseyour steering control and causesevere personal injury or acci-dents.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.

4 17


To change the steering wheel angle, pulldown (1) the lock release lever, adjustthe steering wheel to the desired angle(2), then pull up the lock-release lever tolock the steering wheel in place.Be sure to adjust the steering wheel tothe desired position before driving.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

✽✽ NOTICE - Horn• To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on yoursteering wheel (see illustration). Thehorn will operate only when this areais pressed.

• Do not strike the horn severely tooperate it, or hit it with your fist. Donot press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

OMG045008

(if equipped)

OMG045009


184

The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onthe accelerator pedal.With cruise control, you can set andautomatically maintain any speed ofbetween 24 mph (40 km/h) and 96 mph (160 km/h).

To set cruise control speed:1. Pull the CRUISE ON/OFF button on

the steering wheel, to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 24 mph (40 km/h)and less than 96 mph (160 km/h).

3. Press the COAST/SET switch, locatedon the steering wheel, and release it atthe speed you want. Release the accel-erator at the same time. The desiredspeed will automatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activated untilapproximately 2 seconds after the CRUISEON/OFF button has been engaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle may momen-tarily slow down while going downhill.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise controlDo not use the cruise control fea-ture under the following conditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds

WARNING - Cruise control If the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated) thecruise control can be switched onaccidentally. Keep the cruise con-trol system off (CRUISE indicatorlight OFF) when cruise control isnot in use.

WARNING - Cruise control Do not exceed posted speed limits.Do not set the cruise control at aspeed that is unsafe for the currentdriving conditions.

OMG045010N OMG045011

4 19


To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Press the clutch pedal with a manual

transaxle or shift into N (Neutral) with anautomatic transaxle.

• Press the CANCEL switch located onthe steering wheel.

• Press the COAST/SET andRES/ACCEL switches at the sametime.

Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the “SET” indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will goOFF), but it will not turn the system off. Ifyou wish to resume cruise control opera-tion, press the RES/ACCEL switch locat-ed on your steering wheel.You will returnto your previously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:• Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button on

the steering wheel (the CRUISE indi-cator light in the instrument cluster willgo OFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resumecruise control operation, repeat the stepsprovided in “To Set Cruise ControlSpeed” on the previous page.

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Press the RES/ACCEL switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Releasethe switch at the speed you want.

• Briefly press and release theRES/ACCEL switch. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1 mph (1.6km/h).

OMG045012


204

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control onIf you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, press the accel-erator pedal. Increased speed will notinterfere with cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

To decrease the cruising speed:Follow either of these procedures:• Press the COAST/SET switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will gradually slowdown. Release the switch at the speedyou want to maintain.

• Briefly press and release theCOAST/SET switch. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1 mph (1.6km/h).

To resume cruising speed atmore than 24 mph (40 km/h):If something besides the CRUISEON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruis-ing speed and the system is still activat-ed, the most recent set speed will auto-matically resume when the RES/ACCELswitch is pressed.It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below 24 mph(40km/h).

OMG045011 OMG045012

4 21


The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)monitors information from various vehiclesensors and then compares the driver'scommands with the actual behavior of thevehicle. If an unstable condition occurs - asudden evasive movement for example -ESC intervenes within fractions of asecond via the engine computer andbrake system and attempts to stabilizethe vehicle.

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.

When operatingWhen the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control andindicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG045013N

- ESC


224

ESC operation offESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESC isoff, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, the ESCwill automatically turn onagain. Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, theindicator light illuminates, then goes off ifESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.ESC OFF indicator light comes on wheneither the ESC is turned off with the but-ton, or ESC fails to operate when turnedon.

ESC

ESCOFF

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

WARNING - ESCThe Electronic Stability Control sys-tem is only a driving aid; use pre-cautions for safe driving by slowingdown on curved, snowy, or icyroads.

ESCOFF

4 23


ESC OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press ESC OFF button while ESCis operating (ESC indicator light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽ NOTICE• When measuring the vehicle speed

with a Chassis dynamo-meter, makesure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFFlight illuminated). If the ESC is lefton, it may prevent the vehicle speedfrom increasing, and cause a falsediagnosis of a faulty speedometer.

• Turning the ESC off does not affectABS or brake system operation.

• When attempting to free an ESC-equipped vehicle that is stuck in snow,sand, or mud, use the ESC OFF but-ton to temporarily deactivate the ESCsystem.

WARNING - ESCNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC may be operating, suchas on slippery or winding roads. Ifthe ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may slip outof control. To turn ESC off whiledriving, press the ESC OFF buttonwhile driving on a flat, straight, dryroad surface.


244

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer 2. Turn signal indicators3. Speedometer4. Engine temperature gauge5. Warning and indicator lights6. Odometer / Tripmeter7. Shift position indicator

(Automatic transaxle only)8. Fuel gauge

OMG045902N

➀➁ ➁ ➂

➃ ➄➄

➄

➅➇

➆

4 25


Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

TripmeterYou can choose the tripmeter A and trip-meter B by pressing the tripmeter modebutton.TRIP A: Tripmeter A (if equipped)TRIP B: Tripmeter B (if equipped)The tripmeter indicates the distance ofindividual trips selected by the driver.Tripmeter A and B can be reset to 0 bypressing the reset button for 1 second ormore, and then releasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may move slight-ly when the ignition switch is in ACC orON position with the engine OFF. Thismovement is normal and will not affectthe accuracy of the tachometer once theengine is running.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not operate the engine within thetachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine damage.

GAUGES

OMG045014


264

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank.Fuel tank capacity - 16.38 gallons

(62 liters)The fuel gauge is supplemented by a lowfuel warning light, which will illuminatewhen the fuel level has dropped to about1.8~2.1 gallons (7~8 liters).

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the gauge pointer moves beyond thenormal range area toward the “H” posi-tion, it indicates overheating that maydamage the engine. Trip computer (if equipped)

Trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information system that dis-plays information related to driving on theLCD.

1MGH4920N

Type A

Type B

4 27


ModeEach push of the button (TRIP) changesthe display as follows:

Tripmeter (km or MI)This mode indicates the total distancetraveled since the last tripmeter reset.The meter's working range is from 0.0 to999.9 km (mile).Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the tripmeter is being dis-played, clears the tripmeter to zero.

Driving time (km or MI)This mode displays the total time elepsedfrom engine start to key OFF conditions.When the “TRIP” switch is pushed, it willreset to 0:00.

ResetPush “TRIP” for more than 1 second toinitialize the displayed information suchas average speed and driving time.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

TRIPMETER

OMG045014

AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED

DRIVING TIME

1MGH4922

Type A

Type B

1MGH4923N

Type A

Type B


284

Average vehicle speed (km/h or MPH)This mode displays the average vehiclespeed, and is reset to 0 mph (0km/h)when the ignition key is turned OFF.

Distance to empty (km or MI)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty from the current fuel inthe fuel tank. When the remaining dis-tance is below 30 miles (50 km), a blink-ing “----” symbol will be displayed.The distance to empty value will beaffected by factors such as driving condi-tions, driving habits, and engine condi-tion.

Ambient temperature (°C or °F) (if equipped)This mode indicates the current ambienttemperature. The meter’s working range -40°C (-40°F) to 80°C (176°F)

1MGH4924N

Type A

Type B

1MGH4926N

Type A

Type B

1MGH4921N

Type A

Type B

4 29


✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “DISTANCE TO EMPTY”function may not operate correctly.The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 1.59 US gal(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• Trip computer provides a driver withsupplemental information about thecurrent operating status of your vehi-cle. So the estimated distance to emptycan be changed according to operat-ing status of your vehicle, average fuelconsumption and previously drivingstyle. Therefore the values approvedor displayed on LCD for the first timecan be different with your vehicle’s.

• The figure of distance to empty is esti-mated driving distance, so it can bedifferent from the driving distancereally is.

Instrument panel illumination (if equipped)When the vehicle’s parking lights or head-lights are on, rotate the illumination con-trol knob to adjust the instrument panelillumination intensity.You can turn ON or OFF the interiorlights (map light, dome light) by rotatingthe control knob to the maximum positionwhen the interior lights are turned OFF.

OMG045015


304

Warning lights / audible indicators Checking operation All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an authorized Kiadealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning light (ifequipped) This light illuminates if the key is turnedto ON and goes off in approximately 3seconds if the system is operating nor-mally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS. Contact anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as possi-ble.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD) sys-tem warning(if equipped)

If ABS and BRAKE warning lights illumi-nate at the same time while driving, yourvehicle has a problem with the ABS andEBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally. Have thevehicle checked by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing:1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the engine is not stopped immediately,severe damage could result.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

ABS

ABS

WARNING - Brake indica-tors

If the both ABS and Brake warninglights are ON and stay ON, yourvehicle’s brake system will not worknormally. You may experience anunexpected and dangerous situa-tion during sudden braking. In thiscase, avoid high speed driving andabrupt braking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorized Kia Dealeras soon as possible.

4 31


Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an authorizedKia dealer correct the problem as soonas possible.

Safety belt warning

As a reminder to the driver and passen-ger, safety belt warning light will blink forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch ON.If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when the key is turned ON or if it isdisconnected after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning light will blink forapproximately 6 seconds.If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when you drive over 10 km/h, thesafety belt warning light will blink for 6seconds. This cycle will repeat 11 timeswith an interval of 24 seconds betweencycles.If the system does not operate asdescribed, see an authorized Kia dealerfor assistance.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)

The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transaxle shift leverselection.

Hot temperature warning (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates if the tem-perature of the engine coolant is hot.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the hot temperature indicator illumi-nates, it indicates overheating that maydamage the engine.

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobiliz-er key is inserted and turned to the ONposition to start the engine.At this time, you can start the engine.Thelight goes out after the engine is running.In case this light goes out before youstart the engine, you must turn to theLOCK position and restart the engine.If this light blinks when the ignition switchis in the ON position before starting theengine, have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.


324

Parking brake & brakefluid warning

Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off when the parkingbrake is released.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have it towed to any authorized Kiadealer for a brake system inspectionand necessary repairs.

To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

Trunk lid openwarning (if equipped)

This warning light activates when thetrunk is not closed securely.

Door ajar warning

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely.

Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator (if equipped)This warning light indicates the washerfluid reservoir is near empty. Refill thewasher fluid as soon as possible.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. The warning light willcome on when the fuel level has droppedto about 1.8~2.1 gallons (7~8 liters).Refuel as soon as possible.

Headlight high beamindicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Air bag warning (if equipped)

This warning light will blink or illuminatefor approximately 6 seconds each timeyou turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu-minates while the vehicle is being driven,see an authorized Kia dealer for immedi-ate service.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a brakewarning light on is dangerous. If thebrake warning light remains on,have the brakes checked andrepaired immediately by an author-ized Kia dealer.

AIRBAG

4 33


Malfunction indicator (if equipped)

This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors variousemission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential problem has beendetected somewhere in the emissioncontrol system.Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable and will not need towing, buthave the system checked by an author-ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEA loose fuel filler cap may cause the OnBoard Diagnostic System MalfunctionIndicator Light ( ) in the instrumentpanel to illuminate unnecessarily.Always make sure that the fuel filler capis tight.

✽✽ NOTICE• Prolonged driving with the Emission

Control System MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ( ) illuminatedmay cause damage to the emissioncontrol systems which could effect dri-vability and/or fuel economy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Lamp ( )begins to flash ON and OFF, potentialcatalytic converter damage is possiblewhich could result in loss of enginepower. Have the Engine ControlSystem inspected as soon as possible byan authorized Kia dealer.

ESC indicator (Electronic StabilityControl) (if equipped) The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-onds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC light willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating.

ESC OFF indicator(if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicatingthe ESC is deactivated. If this indicatorstays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESCmay have a malfunction. Take your car tothe authorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

CHECKCHECK

CHECKCHECK

CHECKCHECKESC

ESCOFF


344

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the front foglights are ON.

Auto cruise indicator(if equipped)CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.

SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (COAST/ SET orRES/ACCEL) is ON.

Low tire pressure telltale (if equipped)

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after coming onfor about 3 seconds when you turned theignition key to the "ON" position, the TirePressure Monitoring System is not work-ing properly. If this occurs, have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate if oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible. If the warninglight illuminates while driving, reduce vehi-cle speed immediately and stop the vehi-cle. Avoid hard braking and overcorrectingat the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to theproper pressure as indicated on the vehi-cle’s tire information placard.

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system) malfunction indicator (if equipped)TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. If the warning light doesnot come on, or continuously remains onafter coming on for about 3 seconds whenyou turned the ignition key to the "ON"position, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem is not working porperly. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CRUISE

SET

TPMS

WARNING - Low tire pres-sure

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable and cancontribute to loss of vehicle controland increased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail.

4 35


The warning light also comes on and stayson when there is a problem with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

Safety belt warning chime (if equipped)If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned “ON” or ifit is disconnected after the key is turnON, the safety belt warning chime willsound for approximately 6 seconds.If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when you drive over 10 km/h, thesafety belt warning chime will sound for 6seconds. This cycle will repeat 11 timeswith an interval of 24 seconds betweencycles.

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped)If the driver’s door is opened and the igni-tion key is left in the ignition switch, thekey reminder warning chime will sound.This is to help prevent you from lockingyour keys in the vehicle.

WARNING - Safe stopping• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force, andslowly move to a safe position offthe road.


364

Type A - To operate compass feature

The compass is a convenience featurethat displays the direction of vehicle trav-el.Push the ON/OFF button (1) on lowerpart of mirror, then the vehicle's direc-tional heading will be displayed.Pushing the ON/OFF button (1) again willturn off the display.

Heading display (2) - E : East - W : West - S : South - N : Northex) NE : North East

Calibration procedureIf the compass is not properly calibrated,set to the correct variance zone, or thevehicle is driven in certain environments(tunnel, underground or in-building park-ing garage, near transformer substation),the following may occur:• The display reads "C".• The compass headings become inac-

curate.• The compass heading is not changed.• Some compass headings are not dis-

played.• The compass headings are inaccurate

in long distance driving.This compass automatically calibratesitself while the vehicle is driven as yourroute takes you in complete circles.

If the vehicle's compass headingsbecome inaccurate continuously, thecompass should be manually calibratedas follows:1) Ensure the vehicle is not located near

large steel structures or under electricpower lines.

2) Turn on the compass by pressing theON/OFF button (1).

3) Check the variance zone number bypressing the ON/OFF button (1) for 6-9 seconds and reading the numbershown in the display. If the variancezone number is not correct when com-pared to the chart on page 4-37,adjust the zone using the procedurefound on page 4-37. Next, Press andhold the ON/OFF button for more than9~11 seconds. (The letter “C” will bedisplayed.)

4) Drive the vehicle in a clockwise direc-tion; leave the windshield wipers OFFif it is safe to do so.

The compass should be calibratedprior to driving the vehicle for the firsttime; this procedure should also bedone if the battery was replaced or re-connected.

COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)

1KMA3084A

1

2

Indicator Sensor

4 37


Setting the compass zoneThis compass must be set to compen-sate for the variation between true northand magnetic north. To set variation:1. Find your current location and vari-

ance zone number on the zone map.2. Press and hold the ON/OFF button (1)

for 6~9 seconds. The current zonenumber will appear in the display.

3. Release and press the ON/OFF button(1) until the new zone number appearsin the display. After you stop pressingthe button in, the display will show acompass direction within a few sec-onds.

Operating information1. If you install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

which attaches to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet, that may affect theopration of the compass.

2. If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication soon after repeatedadjustment, have the compasschecked at an authorized dealer.

3. The compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass point in tunnels or whiledriving up or down a steep hill.

1. ON/OFF button2. Heading display

Type B - Z-Nav™ compass(if equipped)

B520C05NF B520C01MG


384

Compass functionThe Compass can be turned ON andOFF and will remember the last statewhen the ignition is cycled. To turn thedisplay feature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to

turn the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button

again to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with pressand hold sequences of the buttonand are detailed below.

There is a difference between magneticnorth and true north. The compass in themirror can compensate for this differencewhen it knows the Magnetic Zone inwhich it is operating. This is set either bythe dealer or by the user. The operatingZone Numbers for North America areshown in the figure to the right.

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location onthe Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button formore than 3 but less than 6 seconds,the current Zone Number will appearon the display.

3. Pressing and holding the buttonagain will cause the numbers to incre-ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the buttonwhen the desired Zone Numberappears on the display will set the newZone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compasswill start displaying a compass head-ing again.

There are some conditions that cancause changes to the vehicle magnets.Items such as installing a ski rack or aCB antenna or even some body repairwork on the vehicle can cause changesto the vehicle's magnetic field. In thesesituations, the compass will need to bere-calibrated to quickly correct for thesechanges. To re-calibrate the compass:1. Press and hold the button for

more than 6 seconds. When the com-pass memory is cleared a "C" willappear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive thevehicle in 2 complete circles at lessthan 5 MPH (8 Km/h).

B520C05NF

4 39


The rear parking assist system assiststhe driver during backward movement ofthe vehicle by sounding a tone of variableduration if any object is sensed within adistance of approximately four feet (120cm) behind the vehicle. This system is asupplemental system and it is not intend-ed to nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of the driver.The sensing range and objectsdetectable by the back sensors are limit-ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as muchattention to what is behind you as youwould in a vehicle without a rear parkingassist system.

Operation of the rear parkingassist systemOperating condition• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition key ON.• Sensing distance in backing up is

approximately 47.2 in. (120 cm).• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the closestone will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 47.2 in. (120 cm) to

31.9 in. (81 cm) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 31.5 in. (80 cm) to16.1 in. (41 cm) from the rear bumper :Buzzer sounds two beeps intermittently

• When an object is within 15.7 in. (40 cm)of the rear bumper : Buzzer sounds con-tinuously.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Supplementalrear parking assist system

Rear parking assist system is onlya supplementary function. The driv-er must turn and look behind thevehicle before backing and thencautiously checks all these rearview mirrors while backing. Theresponsibility of backing up restsalways with the driver.

OMG045017


404

Non-operational conditions ofrear parking assist systemRear parking assist system may notoperate normally when:1. Ice is frozen to the sensor. (It will oper-

ate normally when the ice melts.)2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,

such as snow, mud or water, or thesensor cover is blocked. (It will operatenormally when the material is removedor the sensor is no longer blocked.)

There is a possibility of rear parkingassist system malfunction when:1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such

as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, orgradient.

2. Objects generating excessive noisesuch as vehicle horns, loud motorcycleengines, or truck air brakes can inter-fere with the sensor.

3. Heavy rain or water spray.4. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones present near sensor.5. Sensor is covered with snow.

Detecting range may decrease when:1. Outside air temperature is extremely

hot or cold.2. Objects smaller than 39.4 in. (1 m) and

narrower than 5.5 in. (14 cm) in diam-eter and behind the vehicle.

Following objects may not be recog-nized by the sensor:1. Slim objects such as ropes, chains or

small poles.2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor

signals, such as clothes, spongy mate-rial or snow.

4 41


✽✽ NOTICEIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-tently when shifting the gear to “R” posi-tion, this may indicate a malfunction inthe rear parking assist system. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as possi-ble.

WARNINGPay close attention when the vehi-cle is driven close to objects on theroad, particularly pedestrians,especially children. Be aware thatsome objects may not be detectedby the sensors, due to the objectsdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effectiveness ofthe sensor. Always perform a visu-al inspection to make sure the vehi-cle is clear of all obstructionsbefore moving the vehicle in anydirection.

(Continued)This system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors, it can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slimobjects, or objects located betweensensors may not be detected by thesensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when driving backward.Be sure to inform any drivers in thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.Always drive safely and cautiously.

WARNING - Supplementalrear parking assist system

1. The rear parking assist systemmay not sound depending on thespeed and shapes of the objectsbehind the vehicle.

2. The rear parking assist systemmay not function if the vehiclebumper height or sensor installa-tion has been modified. Any non-factory installed equipment oraccessories may also interferewith the sensor performance.

3. Sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 16 in. (40 cm)from the sensor, or it may sensean incorrect distance. Use cau-tion.

4. When sensor is frozen with ice,snow, mud or water, sensor maybe inoperative.

5. Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor with any hard objects thatcould damage the surface of thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.

(Continued)


424

Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the headlights and parkinglights when the driver removes the igni-tion key and opens the driver- sidedoor.

• With this feature, the parklight will beturned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on whenthe ignition key is removed, perform thefollowing :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and aparking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail, posi-tion, license and instrument panel lightsare ON.

LIGHTING

OMG045019OMG045018

4 43


Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position) the head, tail,position, license and instrument panellights are ON.

Auto light position (if equipped)When the light switch is in the AUTO lightposition, the taillights and headlights willbe turned ON or OFF automaticallydepending on the amount of light outsidethe vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICE• Never place anything over sensor (1)

located on the instrument panel, thiswill ensure better auto-light systemcontrol.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a windowcleaner, the cleanser may leave a lightfilm which could interfere with sensoroperation.

• If your vehicle has window tint orother types of coating on the frontwindshield, the Auto light system maynot work properly. OMG045020 OMG045021


444

High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it backfor low beams.The high-beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down.Green arrow indicators on the instrumentpanel indicate which turn signal is oper-ating. They will self-cancel after a turn iscompleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.

OMG045024OMG045023OMG045022

4 45


Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position.The lever will return to the OFF positionwhen released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out andwill require replacement.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quickor slow, the bulb may be burned out orhave a poor electrical connection in thecircuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility and avoid accidents when visibili-ty is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. Thefog lights will turn on when the fog lightswitch (1) is turned to ON (2) after theheadlight switch is turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the switchto OFF.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen in operation, the fog lights con-sume large amounts of vehicle electricalpower. Only use the fog lights when vis-ibility is poor. Unnecessary battery andgenerator drain could occur if the foglights are used excessively.

OMG045025


464

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist.To vary the speed setting, turn thespeed control knob (1). (S : slowoperation, F: fast operation)

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speedMIST : For a single wiping cycle, push

the lever upward and release itwith the lever in the OFF position.The wipers will operate continu-ously if the lever is pushedupward and held.

✽✽ NOTICEBefore using the windshield wiperswhen there is a heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield, defrostthe windshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow or ice is removed. Thiswill help ensure proper windshieldwiper operation and will prevent dam-age to the wiper blades, wiper linkage,and wiper motor.

✽✽ NOTICE• To prevent possible damage to the

wipers or windshield, do not operatethe wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline, kerosene,paint thinner, or other solvents on ornear them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper armsand other components, do not attemptto move the wipers manually.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OMG045028L

4 47


Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 2-3cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located in thefront of the engine compartment on thepassenger side.

✽✽ NOTICETo prevent possible damage to the wash-er pump, do not operate the washerwhen the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defrosters;the washer solution could freeze oncontact with the windshield andobscure your vision.

OMG045032L


484

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from theinterior and exterior of the rear window,while the engine is running.

✽✽ NOTICE• To prevent damage to the conductors

bonded to the inside surface of therear window, never use sharp instru-ments or window cleaners containingabrasives to clean the window.

• To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, the rear window defrosterwill only operate when the engine isrunning.

• If you want to defrost and defog onthe front windshield, refer to“Windshield Defrosting andDefogging” in this section.

To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster button.The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation of snow onthe rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button again.

Outside mirror heater (if equipped)There is no control button for the outsidemirror heater; instead the outside mirrorheater automatically turns on when therear window defroster is turned on.

The hazard warning flasher causes therear tail lights and front turn signal lightsto flash on and off, which serves as awarning to other drivers to exercise cau-tion when approaching or passing yourvehicle.To activate the flasher, depress the haz-ard warning flasher switch. This switchoperates in any ignition switch position.To turn the flashers off, depress theswitch again.

DEFROSTER

OMG045033N

OMG045034

Type A

Type BOMG065001

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

4 49


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG045069N

1. Fan speed control knob2. Air intake control button3. Mode selection knob4. Temperature control knob5. Air conditioning button

(if equipped)


504

Fan speed control knob The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allows you tocontrol the fan speed of the air flowingfrom the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.Setting the mode selection knob to theOFF position turns off the fan.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment turn the knob to theright for warm and hot air or left for cool-er air.

Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The steps (•) between the air flow posi-tions represent a midpoint betweenthose positions.

OMG045037 OMG045037NOMG045071N

4 51


MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode while the fan is on,the following system settingswill be made automatically;• the air conditioning system

will be turned on.• the recirculated air position

will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/C mode,you will not be able to cancelthe A/C system operation, orchange the recirculated airmode position.Set the fan speed controlknob to the desired speedand rotate the temperaturecontrol knob to the extremeleft position for maximumcooling.(outlet port: B, D)

MAXA/C

OMG045039


524

Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, D)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor. The airto the floor is warmer thanthe air to the face (exceptwhen the temperature controlis set to the extreme coldposition).(outlet port: B, C, E, D)

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: C, E, A, D)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, E, D)

Defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the windshield with asmall amount of air directedto the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, D)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, D) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.The air from outlet port (D) flows at anymode. Close the ventilation outlets usingthe thumbwheel to block the air flow.

OMG045040

4 53


Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.Use this position only forshort period with the recircu-lated air position selected, airfrom passenger compart-ment will be drawn throughthe climate control systemand heated or cooled accord-ing to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged use of the air conditioningwith the “recirculated air position”selected, will result in excessively dry airin the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Recirculatedair

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating systemon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can slightly reduce oxy-gen levels which can lead tocause drowsiness or sleepiness,and loss of vehicle control. Setthe air intake control to the out-side (fresh) air position as muchas possible while driving.

OMG045041


544

Air conditioning button (if equipped) Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate). Push the button again to turn theair conditioning system off.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the , position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-ing to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the extremeleft position, set the mode control tothe MAX A/C position, then set the fanspeed control to the highest speed.

✽✽ NOTICE• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gaugeclosely while driving up hills or inheavy traffic when outside tempera-tures are high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may cause engine over-heating. Continue to use the blowerfan but turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gauge indi-cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humidweather air conditioning may createwater droplets inside the vehicle.Since excessive water droplets maycause damage to electrical equipment,air conditioning should only be runwith the windows closed.

OMG045042N

4 55


Air conditioning system opera-tion tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy or humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles.This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system perform-ance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even pudding) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the performance of the air condi-tioning system is reduced it is importantthat the correct type and amount of oiland refrigerant is used. Otherwise,damage to the compressor and abnor-mal system operation may occur.

CAUTION The air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer. Improper service may causeserious injury to the person per-forming the service.


564

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG045043N

1. Temperature control knob2. AUTO (automatic control) button3. Fan speed control knob4. Mode selection button5. OFF button6. Front windshield defrost button7. Rear windshield defrost button8. Air intake control button9. Air conditioning button10. Indicator light

4 57


Automatic operationThe automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicatedby AUTO on the display. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallybased on temperature setting.

2. Turn the TEMP knob to set the desiredtemperature.If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,press any button except temperaturecontrol button and AQS button (ifequipped). If you press the modeselection button, air-conditioning but-ton, defrost button, air intake controlbutton or fan speed button, the select-ed function will be controlled manuallywhile other functions operate automat-ically.

Regardless of the temperature setting,when using automatic operation, the airconditioning system will automaticallyturn on to decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle, even if the temperature is setto warm.

✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sensorlocated on the instrument panel toensure better control of the heating andcooling system.

OMG045044 OMG045045


584

Manual operation The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the AUTO button. Inthis case, the system works sequentiallyaccording to the order of buttons select-ed.When pressing any button except AUTObutton while automatic operation, thefunctions of the buttons not selected willbe controlled automatically.Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem. Temperature control knob

The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum (HI) by turning the knob to the rightextremely.The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum (Lo) by turning the knob to the leftextremely.When turning the knob, the temperaturewill increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.When set to the lowest temperature set-ting, the air conditioning will operate con-tinuously.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode willdisplay metric units.This is normal condition and you canswitch the temperature mode betweenCelsius to Fahrenheit as follows;While depressing the OFF button,depress the AUTO button for 3 secondsor more. The display will change fromCelsius to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheitto Celsius.

OMG045046

4 59


Fan speed control knobThe fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by turning the fan speed controlknob.Pressing the OFF button turns off thefan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.Use this position only forshort period with the recircu-lated air position selected, airfrom passenger compart-ment will be drawn throughthe climate control systemand heated or cooled accord-ing to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air positionWith the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged use of the air conditioningwith the “recirculated air position”selected, will result in excessively dry airin the passenger compartment.

OMG045047 OMG045062


604

WARNING - Recirculatedair

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating systemon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can slightly reduce oxy-gen levels which can lead tocause drowsiness or sleepiness,and loss of vehicle control. Setthe air intake control to the out-side (fresh) air position as muchas possible while driving.

OMG045039

4 61


Mode selection button The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The air flow outlet port changes as fol-lows:

Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, D)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor. The airto the floor is warmer thanthe air to the face(except when the tempera-ture control is set to theextreme cold position).(outlet port: B, C, E, D)

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: C, E, A, D)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, E, D)

Defrost button Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.(outlet port: A, D)

OMG045050 OMG045068


624

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, D) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.The air from outlet port (D) flows at anymode. Close the ventilation outlets usingthe thumbwheel to block the air flow ifyou do not want the air.

Air conditioning button Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate).Push the button again to turn the air con-ditioning system off.

OFF buttonPush the OFF button to turn off the air cli-mate control system. However you canstill operate the mode and air intake but-tons as long as the ignition switch is ON.

OMG045052OMG045040 OMG045053

4 63


Air conditioning system opera-tion tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles on.This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system perform-ance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even pudding) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using the air conditioning system,monitor the temperature gauge closelywhile driving up hills or in heavy trafficwhen outside temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operation maycause engine overheating. Continue touse the blower fan but turn the air con-ditioning system off if the temperaturegauge indicates engine overheating.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the performance of the air condi-tioning system is reduced it is importantthat the correct type and amount of oiland refrigerant is used. Otherwise, dam-age to the compressor and abnormalsystem operation may occur.

CAUTION The air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer. Improper service may causeserious injury to the person per-forming the service.


644

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select any fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected.If the outside (fresh) air position is notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the right position.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temper-ature control to the extreme right/hot posi-tion and the fan speed control to the high-est speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the mode tothe floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice fromthe windshield, rear window, outside rearview mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood andair inlet in the cowl grill to improve heaterand defroster efficiency and to reduce theprobability of fogging up inside of thewindshield.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

CAUTION - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.

OMG045055N OMG045056N

4 65


Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select desired temperature.2. Press the defrost button ( ).3. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position andhigher fan speed are not selected auto-matically, adjust the corresponding but-ton or knob manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme

right) position.2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extreme highesttemperature setting and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield.

CAUTION - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.

OMG045057N OMG045058N


664

Defogging logicManual climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to the outside (fresh) airposition automatically if any of followingoccur.• The mode is set to the , or

while the ignition switch is turned on.• The ignition switch is turned off.• The fan is off.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.

How to cancel or return defogging logicof manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton ( ) will blink 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset to the defog logicstatus.

OMG045063N

4 67


Automatic climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to outside (fresh) air posi-tion automatically if any of followingoccur.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the , ,.

• The OFF button is pushed.• The mode is selected to the or

position.If you don’t want the outside (fresh) airposition, press the corresponding buttonto cancel the operation.

How to cancel or return defogging logicof automatic climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Select the defrost position pressing

defrost button ( ).3. While holding the air conditioning but-

ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intakecontrol button ( ) at least 5 timeswithin 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset to the defog logicstatus.

OMG045064

5

Fuel requirements / 5-2Emission control system / 5-2Before driving / 5-4Suggestions for economical operation / 5-5Special driving conditions / 5-6Vehicle load limit / 5-10Weight of the vehicle / 5-15Trailer towing / 5-16Label information / 5-22

Driving tips

Driving tips

25

FUEL REQUIREMENTSGasoline engine (unleaded)Your new Kia vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel with a minimumOctane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index(AKI).

✽✽ NOTICENEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The useof leaded fuel is detrimental to the cat-alytic converter and will damage theengine control system’s oxygen sensorand affect emission control.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other than whatKia has specified. (Consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer for details.)

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alcohol),and gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alcohol)are being marketed along with or insteadof leaded or unleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing more than10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline orgasohol containing any methanol. Eitherof these fuels may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind ifdrivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or driveability problemsmay not be covered by the manufactur-er’s warranty if they result from the useof:1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

✽✽ NOTICENever use gasohol which containsmethanol. Discontinue use of any gaso-hol product which impairs drivability.

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Warranty &Consumer Information Manual in yourvehicle.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Kia could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, mayviolate governmental safety and emis-sions regulations, and void the vehicle’swarranty.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide)

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions following toavoid CO impairment.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

5 3

Driving tips

• Carbon monoxide can be present withother exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) anymore than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to re-start theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyticconverters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engine (unleaded).• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorized Kiadealer.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park the vehicle over ornear flammable objects, such asgrass, vegetation, paper, leaves,etc.

Driving tips

45

BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided inSection 7, Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgement. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink or takedrugs and drive.If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

5 5

Driving tips

SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATIONYour vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects how manymiles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicleas economically as possible, use the fol-lowing driving suggestions to help savemoney in both fuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the

engine is running smoothly, begin driv-ing. Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowly afterstopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and follow therecommended periodic maintenanceschedule. This will increase the life ofall parts and lower your operatingcosts.

• Do not use the air conditioner unnec-essarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tire life and better fuel econ-omy, always keep the tires inflated tothe recommended pressures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops. Thiswill reduce wear on brake linings andpads. Driving in such a way will alsosave fuel because extra fuel is requiredto accelerate back to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weight in thevehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causeneedless wear, possible damage to thebrakes, and poor fuel economy.

• Improper wheel alignment results infaster tire wear and lower fuel econo-my.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorized Kiadealer perform scheduled inspectionsand maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not functionproperly without the engine run-ning. Instead, keep the engine onand downshift to an appropriategear for engine braking effect.

Driving tips

65

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONSHazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction when stalledin ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle tofree it from snow, sand, or mud, first turnthe steering wheel right and left to clearthe area around your front wheels. Then,shift back and forth between 1 (First) andR (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with amanual transaxle or R (Reverse) and anyforward gear in vehicles equipped withan automatic transaxle. Do not race theengine, and spin the wheels as little aspossible. If you are still stuck after a fewtries, have the vehicle pulled out by a towvehicle to avoid engine overheating andpossible damage to the transaxle.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged rocking may cause engineover-heating, transaxle damage or fail-ure, and tire damage.

CAUTION - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slipperysurfaces can cause an accident.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Becareful when downshifting on slip-pery surfaces.

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 35 mph (56km/h). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheat,explode and injure bystanders.

5 7

Driving tips

Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could betemporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read-just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive throughthem slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

Winter driving• We recommend that you carry emer-

gency equipment, including tire chains,a window scraper, windshield de-icer,a bag of sand or salt, flares, a smallshovel and jumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient ethyl-ene-glycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reduce theoutput capability of any battery, so itmust be in excellent condition to pro-vide enough winter starting power.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze-formulated windshieldwasher fluid. (Do not use enginecoolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if it mightfreeze. When parking, shift to 1 (First)or R (Reverse) with a manual transaxleor P (Park) with an automatic transaxleand block the rear wheels.

Driving tips

85

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your Kia,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without firstchecking local, state and municipal regu-lations for possible restrictions againsttheir use.

Tire chains Since the sidewalls of radial tires arethinner, they can be damaged by mount-ing some types of snow chains on them.Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-ommended instead of snow chains. Donot mount tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels; snowchains may cause damage to the wheels.If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehiclecaused by improper snow chain use isnot covered by your vehicle manufactur-ers warranty.Install tire chains only on the front tires.

✽✽ NOTICE• Make sure the snow chains are the

correct size and type for your tires.Incorrect snow chains can cause dam-age to the vehicle body and suspensionand may not be covered by your vehi-cle manufacturer warranty. Also, thesnow chain connecting hooks may bedamaged from contacting vehiclecomponents causing the snow chainsto come loose from the tire. Make surethe snow chains are SAE class “S”certified.

• Always check chain installation forproper mounting after drivingapproximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1km) to ensure safe mounting.Retighten or remount the chains ifthey are loose.

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safety andhandling of your vehicle may beadversely affected.

1JBA4068

5 9

Driving tips

Chain installation When installing chains, follow the manu-facturer's instructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withchains installed. If you hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stop andtighten them. If they still make contact,slow down until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin driving oncleared roads.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.

WARNING - Mountingchains

When mounting snow chains, parkthe vehicle on level ground awayfrom traffic. Turn on the vehicleHazard Warning flashers and placea triangular emergency warningdevice behind the vehicle if avail-able. Always place the vehicle inpark (P), apply the parking brakeand turn off the engine beforeinstalling snow chains.

WARNING - Tire chains• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-ommended speed limit, whichev-er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,holes, sharp turns, and other roadhazards, which may cause thevehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

• Chains that are the wrong size orimproperly installed can damageyour vehicle's brake lines, sus-pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten thechains any time you hear themhitting the vehicle.

Driving tips

105

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading informationlabelThe label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:827 lbs (375 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can safely tow.■ 2.4L Engine, Manual transaxle

Without trailer brakes:1000 lbs (454 kg)With trailer brakes:2000 lbs (907 kg)

■ 2.4L Engine, Automatic transaxleWe do not recommend using thisversion of the vehicle for trailertowing and thus it has no approvedcapacity.

■ 2.7L Engine, Automatic transaxleWithout trailer brakes:1000 lbs (454 kg)With trailer brakes:2000 lbs (907 kg)

P205/60R16 210kPa, 30psi

210kPa, 30psi

420kPa, 60psi

P205/60R16

T125/80D16

5 2 3

220kPa, 32psi

420kPa, 60psi

P215/50R17

220kPa, 32psiP215/50R17

T125/80D16

5 2 3

375 827

375 827

SEE OWNER'SMANUAL FORADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SEE OWNER'SMANUAL FORADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

1MGN5900

Type A

Type B

5 11

Driving tips

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

Steps for determining correctload limit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 1400lbs. (635 kg), and there will be five150 lbs. (68 kg) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs. (295 kg).(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs. or635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2(136 kg)

CAvailable Cargo and 1100 lbs

Luggage weight (499 kg)

Example 1

A B C

WARNINGDo not use the 2.4L automatictransaxle vehicle for towing.

Driving tips

125

Refer to your vehicle's tire and load-ing information label for specificinformation about your vehicle'scapacity weight and seating posi-tions. The combined weight of thedriver, passengers and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle's capacityweight.

C190F02JM




B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5(340 kg)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 860 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5(390 kg)



A B C

Example 3

5 13

Driving tips

Compliance labelThe compliance label is located onthe driver's door sill.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles when towing,you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. This is animportant part of your obligation indeciding to tow your vehicle. Be sureto spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.1JBN5901

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

• If you overload your vehicle,the tires can suddenly andwithout warning fail. The over-loading can also make yourvehicle unstable and dramati-cally increase braking dis-tance.This could cause you tolose control and crash.

WARNING - Load distrib-utor

Your vehicle may becomeunstable while towing if yourvehicle is overloaded to oneside. Make sure that the load inthe vehicle is distributed equal-ly to each side of the centerline.

Driving tips

145

✽✽ NOTICE• Overloading your vehicle may

shorten its life and cause damage.Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

• Using heavier suspension compo-nents to get added durabilitymight not change your vehicle’sweight ratings.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going if they arenot secured and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passen-ger.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orsharp turn, or in a crash.• Put items in the trunk of your

vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the occupantcompartment.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle,since it can injure occupantsin a crash.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

5 15

Driving tips

WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLEThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the compliancelabel:Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the compliance label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the compliance labellocated on the driver’s door sill.

Driving tips

165

TRAILER TOWING

✽✽ NOTICEPulling a trailer improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty.

To identify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, you shouldrefer to the chart on this page.

Remember that trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering causes major changes in han-dling, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering requires cor-rect equipment, and cautious driving.

This section contains many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

WARNING - Towing a trail-er

If you don't use the correct equip-ment or you drive improperly, youcan lose control when you pull atrailer. For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes may fail, andwould at least be ineffective topromptly stop the vehicle. You andyour passengers could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps inthis section.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure the totaltrailer weight, gross combinationweight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue loadare all within safe limits.

Engine 2.4 Engine 2.7 Engine

Item MT*1 AT*2 AT*2

Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 1000 (454) *3 1000 (454)

weight lbs. (kg) With trailer brakes 2000 (907) *3 2000 (907)

Maximum permissible static vertical 176 (80) *3 176 (80)

load on the coupling device lbs. (kg)

*1 MT : Manual transaxle *2 AT : Automatic transaxle*3 : Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

5 17

Driving tips

Load-pulling components such as theengine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, andtires are forced to work harder againstthe load of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higherspeeds and under greater loads. Thisadditional burden generates extra heatwhich creates more wear in engine, anda shortened engine life. The trailer alsoadds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

Hitches It's important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by, and rough roads are a few rea-sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• Do not attach a trailer hitch which

requires you to alter other parts onyour vehicle.

• Never make a hole in your vehicle toaccommodate a hitch.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are notintended for hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other bumper-typehitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-ufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trailer.And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum weight for a trailer without brakes,then the trailer needs its own brakes.Youmust consult with a knowledgeable andreputabel trailer vendor to determinewhich brake equipped trailer is right foryour needs. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes soyou’ll be able to install, adjust and main-tain them properly.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolutelycertain that you have properly setup the brake system pursuant tothe trailer manufacture’s instruc-tions. This is not a task for ama-teurs. Use an experienced, compe-tent trailer shop for this work.

WARNINGIf you damage the body of your car,installing, or using a trailer hitch,you must have any resulting holeimmediately repaired, An unsealedhole can allow deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaustinto your vehicle.

WARNING - Trailer andvehicle brakes

NEVER connect or allow anyoneelse to connect your vehicle’sbrakes to any trailer brake system.Altering your vehicle’s brakes couldresult in total brake failure.

Driving tips

185

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires experience. Youmust gain that experience slowly andcarefully which practicing with anunloaded or lightly loaded trailer. Beforesetting out for the open road, you mustget to know your trailer. Acquaint yourselfwith the feel of handling and braking withthe trailer. And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearly so responsiveas your vehicle is by itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform, safety chains, electricalconnector(s), lights, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has brakes, fol-low the trailer manufacturer’s instructionsas to how to check the brakes before youstart driving.During your trip, stop every hour or so tobe sure that the load is secure, and thatthe lights and any trailer brakes are work-ing.

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-cle ahead as you would when drivingyour vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distance upahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,because of the increased vehicle length,you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing up The trailer will go in the opposite direc-tion of the rear of your vehicle whenbacking up. This is very difficult for aninexperienced trailer driver to get usedto. To help you avoid mistakes, hold thebottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just hold the steering wheel firmly andmove your hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and, if pos-sible, have someone guide you.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this so yourtrailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal flasher andextra wiring. The green arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properlyconnected, the trailer lights will also flashto alert other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think driversbehind you are seeing your signalswhen, in fact, they are not. It’s importantto check regulary to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you discon-nect and then reconnect the wires.Do not connect a trailer lighting systemdirectly to your vehicle’s lighting system.Use only an approved trailer wiring har-ness.Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assistyou in installing the wiring harness.

WARNING - Trailer wiringharness

Failure to use an approved trailerwiring harness could result in anaccident due to the failure of thetrailer lights to operate.

5 19

Driving tips

✽✽ NOTICEFailure to sue a trailer wiring harnesscan damage your vehicle’s electrical sys-tem.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, youmight have to use your brakes so muchthat they would get hot and no longeroperate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 45 mph (70km/h) to reduce the possibility of engineand transaxle overheating.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) whentowing a trailer will minimize heat build upand extend the life of your transaxle.

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park your vehi-cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.People can be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged if they begin a downhill.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into

gear.2. Have someone place chocks (blocks

of wood or metal intended for this pur-pose) under the downhill sides of thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place,release the brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) foran automatic transaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

CAUTIONWhen towing a trailer on steepgrades especially (in excess of 6%)pay close attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not over-heat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves acrossthe dial towards “H” (HOT), pull overand stop as soon as it is safe to doso, and allow the engine to idle untilit cools down. You may proceedonce the engine has cooled suffi-ciently.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with atrailer attached is dangerous. Itcould cause serious injury or death,should the trailer break lose, orshould the trailer drag the vehicledownhill.

Driving tips

205

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold thebrake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly forward until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you regularly pull a trailer.Important items to pay particular atten-tion to include engine oil, automatictransaxle fluid, axle lubricant and coolingsystem fluid. Brake condition is anotherimportant item to frequently check. Eachitem is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthese sections before you start your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain your trailerand hitch. Follow the maintenanceschedule that accompanied your trailerand check it periodically. Preferably, con-duct the check at the start of each day’sdriving. Most importantly, all hitch nutsand bolts should be tight.

✽✽ NOTICE• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur in hotdays or during uphill driving. If thecoolant gauge indicates over-heating,switch off the A/C and stop the vehiclein a safe area to cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxle fluidmore frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped withthe air conditioner, you should installa condenser fan to improve engineperformance when towing a trailer.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brake isnot firmly set or if the engine is stillrunning.In either case the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beseriously or fatally injured.

5 21

Driving tips

If you do decide to pull a trailer Here are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control.You can

ask a hitch dealer about sway control.• After your odometer indicates 500

miles (800 km) or more, you can tow atrailer. For the first 500 miles (800 km)that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t makestarts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle“wear” in at the heavier loads.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 60 mph (100km/h)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted speedlimit, whichever is lower.

• The important considerations have todo with weight:

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than the maxi-mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. Buteven that can be too heavy. If you feel thatthe trailer is adversely affecting the move-ment of your vehicle, reduce your speed,avoid uneven or winding roads, avoidroads with steep grades, and/or lightenyour trailer load.

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle since that is thetrailer weight pushing down on the hitchon your vehicle. The rest of the trailerweight is sitting on the trailer’s wheels.The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight. After you've loaded the trailer, goto a Weigh Station and weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see ifthe weights are proper. If they aren’t, youmay be able to correct them simply bymoving some items around in the trailer.

WARNING - Trailer balance• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately40% of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer or trail-er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in excessivepersonal injury. Check weightsand loading at a commercialscale or highway patrol officeequipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.

Driving tips

225

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labels andidentification numbers located on yourvehicle. The label locations are identifiedin the illustrations shown.

Vehicle identification number(VIN) To check the frame number under thepassenger seat, remove the cover.

OMG055005

Frame number

Identification label (if equipped)Type A Type B

VIN (if equipped)

VIN bar code (if equipped)OMG055004OMG055002

OMG055001 OMG055003Compliance label (if equipped)

Type A Type B

5 23

Driving tips

Tire specification / pressure label

Engine number

OMG055004N

OMG055007

OMG055008

2.4 Gasoline engine

2.7 Gasoline engine

6

Road warning / 6-2Overheating / 6-2Emergency starting / 6-3Electrical circuit protection / 6-6Towing / 6-13Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-18If you have a flat tire / 6-22



26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle. Itshould be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, if you experience a loss ofpower, or if you hear a loud knocking orpinging noise, the engine has probablyoverheated. Should any of these symp-toms occur, use the following procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,

then drive to the nearest safe locationand stop your vehicle; set the automat-ic transaxle in P (Park), or shift themanual transaxle to N (Neutral) andapply the parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator, stop the engine and call anauthorized Kia dealer for assistance.If coolant is not boiling out, allow theengine to idle and open the hood topermit the engine to cool gradually.If the temperature does not go downwith the engine idling, stop the engineand allow sufficient time for it to cool.

OVERHEATING

OMG065001

6 3


4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reservoir islow, look for leaks at the radiator hosesand connections, heater hoses andconnections, radiator, and waterpump. If you find a major leak or anoth-er problem that may have caused theengine to overheat, do not operate theengine until it has been corrected. Callan authorized Kia dealer for assis-tance. If you do not find a leak or otherproblem, carefully add coolant to thereservoir.

If the engine frequently overheats, havethe cooling system checked and repairedby an authorized Kia dealer.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEUse only a 12-volt jumper system. Youcan damage a 12-volt starting motor,ignition system, and other electricalparts beyond repair by use of a 24-voltpower supply (either two 12-volt batter-ies in series or a 24-volt motor generatorset).

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure. Thiscould cause serious injury.

EMERGENCY STARTING

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

• Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.


46

Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Remove the engine cover.5. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the previous illus-tration. First connect one end of ajumper cable to the positive terminal ofthe discharged battery (1), then con-nect the other end to the positive ter-minal on the booster battery (2).

6. Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (3), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the enginelifting bracket) away from the battery(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked. Do not connect the jumpercable from the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative termi-nal of the discharged battery.

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Booster battery

OMG065002

Jumper Cables

6 5


Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct bat-tery terminals or the correct ground.Do not lean over the battery whenmaking connections.

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent, you should have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Push-starting Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicleshould not be push-started because itmight damage the emission control sys-tem.Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this section forjump-starting.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative ter-minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged bat-tery to overheat and crack, releas-ing battery acid.


66

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Fuses A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has two fuse panels, onelocated in the driver's side panel bolster,the other in the engine compartmentnear the battery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse will bemelted.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an authorized Kia dealer.Two kinds of fuses are used: standard forlower amperage rating and main for high-er amperage ratings.

Fuse replacement

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use a screwdriver or any othermetal object to remove fuses because itmay cause a short circuit and damagethe system.

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage through overheat-ing and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensivewiring damage and possibly afire.

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

6 7


Driver-side panel bolster1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Open the cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool (1) provided inthe engine compartment fuse/relaybox.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.Spare fuses are provided in the fusepanel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kiadealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse ofthe same rating from a circuit you maynot need for operating the vehicle, suchas the audio fuse.If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse block in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

OMG065003 OMG065004


86

Engine compartment1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-

ing the taps and pulling up.3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kiadealer.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter checking the fuse box in the enginecompartment, securely install the fusebox cover. If not, electrical failures mayoccur from water leaking in.

Main fuseIf the MAIN fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the MAIN fuse is blown, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

OMG065005 OMG065019

6 9


Engine compartment

OMG065006

Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relaylabel describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Engine compartment

Description Fuse rating Protected componentI/P B+ 2 50A In panel B+ABS 2 40A ABSDRL 15A Daytime running lightHORN 15A HornH/LP LOW 15A Headlight (low)F/PUMP 20A Fuel pumpH/LP HI 15A Headlight (high)ECU 10A Engine control unitABS 1 40A ABSALT 125A (150A)* AlternatorSPARE 10A Spare fuseSPARE 15A Spare fuseSPARE 20A Spare fuseFRT FOG 15A Front fog lightECU RELAY 30A Engine control unitPOWER AMP 20A AmplifierSPARE 15A Spare fuseSPARE 20A Spare fuseP/OUTLET 25A Power outletRAD FAN 30A (40A)* Radiator fanPCU 10A Power train control system sen-

sors, TCUABS 10A ABSS/WARMER 25A Seat warmerATM 20A Automatic transaxle controlS/ROOF 20A SunroofSPARE 20A Spare fuse


106

OMG065007

Driver-side knee bolsterDescription Fuse rating Protected componentBACK UP 10A Back-up lightRR HTD 40A Rear window defrosterIGN 1 30A IgnitionB+ 30A In pannel B+

TAIL 20A TaillightA/CON 10A Air conditionerECU-1 20A Engine control unitIGN COIL 20A Ignition coilSNSR 3 10A SensorsBLOWER 40A BlowerIGN 2 30A IgnitionSNSR 2 15A SensorsSNSR 1 15A SensorsHORN RELAY - Horn relayHDLP_LOW RELAY - Headlight (low) relayRAD FAN_HI RELAY - Radiator fan relayRAD FAN_LOW RELAY - Radiator fan relayF/PUMP RELAY - Fuel pump relayWIPER RELAY - Wiper relayMAIN RELAY - Main relaySTART RELAY - Start motor relayATM CONT RELAY - Automatic transaxle control relayA/CON RELAY - Air conditioner relay

* : if equipped

6 11


Driver-side knee bolster

Description Fuse rating Protected componentH/LP 10A HeadlightA/CON SW 10A Air conditionerSTART 10A Start motorP/SEAT RH 30A Power seat (right)P/WDW RH 25A Power window (right)WIPER 25A Front wiperMIRR HTD 10A Outside rearview mirror defrosterRR FOG 15A Rear fog lightP/SEAT LH 30A Power seat (left)P/WDW LH 25A Power window (left)SPARE 10A Spare fuseMODULE-2 10A ClusterW/DEICER 15A DeicerTAIL RH 10A Taillight (right)TAIL LH 10A Taillight (left)EPS 10A Power steering wheelA/CON 10A Air conditionerSAFETY PWR 20A Safety power windowA/BAG IND 10A Airbag warningA/BAG 15A AirbagDR LOCK 25A Central door lockSPARE 10A Spare fuseCLUSTER 10A ClusterMODULE-1 10A BWS buzzer, ESP switch

Description Fuse rating Protected componentHAZARD 15A Hazard warning lightSTOP LP 15A Stop lightSPARE 15A Spare fuseTELL TALE 10A ClockT/LID OPEN 15A Trunk lid openerADJ PEDAL 10A Adjust pedal relay SPARE 15A Spare fuseT/SIG 10A Turn signal lightTPMS 10A TPMSBLOWER MTR 10A Blower, Air conditionerMEMORY 15A Cluster, ETACS, A/C, Clock,

Room lampAUDIO 15A AudioC/LIGHTER 25A Cigar lighterD/CLOCK 10A Clock


126

Memory fuseYour vehicle is equipped with memoryfuses to prevent battery discharge if yourvehicle is parked without being operatedfor prolonged periods. Use the followingprocedures before parking the vehicle forprolonged period.1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver-side knee bolster

cover and pull up the “MEMORY 15A /AUDIO 15A”.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the memory fuses are pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. Someitems must be reset after replacement.

• Even though the memory fuses arepulled up, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

OMG065008

6 13


TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truckservice. Proper lifting and towing proce-dures are necessary to prevent damageto the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed equipment is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with therear wheels on the ground (without dol-lies) and the front wheels off the ground.When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, thefront of the vehicle should always be lift-ed, not the rear.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the ground asthis may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment.Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

1JBA65021JBA6501

OMG065025

OMG065024


146

When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

✽✽ NOTICEFailure to place the transaxle shift leverin N (Neutral) may cause internal dam-age to the transaxle.

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

CAUTIONDo not use the hooks under the front of the vehicle for towing purposes.These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooksare used for towing, the tie-down hooks will be damaged and this could leadto serious injury.

Tie-down hook

OMG065009/OMG065010

6 15


Front towing hook1. Open the trunk lid, and remove the

towing hook from the tool bag.2. Remove the hole cover pressing the

lower part of the cover on the frontbumper (1).

3. Install the towing hook by turning itclockwise into the hole until it is fullysecured (2).

4. Remove the towing hook and installthe cover after use.

Towing with a vehicle other thana tow truck If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an authorized Kiadealer or a commercial tow truck service.

OMG065011

1

OMG065012

2

OMG065012

OMG065013

• Front

• Rear


166

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the front or rear of the vehicle. Useextreme caution when towing the vehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-tions from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should com-municate with each other frequently.

✽✽ NOTICE• Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle other

than the tow hooks for towing maydamage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing hook provided.

• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5m) long. Attach a white or red cloth(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in themiddle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strapis not loosened during towing.

CAUTIONUse extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the towing vehicle does not moveeasily, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact an authorized Kiadealer or a commercial tow truckservice for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

1JBA4124

6 17


When your vehicle is being towedby another vehicle other than a towtruck (in case of an emergency)• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking bake.• Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxles should not exceed 28 mph(45 km/h) and should not be towedmore than 50 miles (80 km).

• Vehicles equipped with manualtransaxle should not be towed inexcess of 55 mph (88 km/h) andshould not be towed more than 400miles (645 km).

• Press the brake pedal with more forcethan normal since you will havereduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be requiredbecause the power steering systemwill be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, thebrakes may overheat and brake per-formance will be reduced. Stop oftenand let the brakes cool off.

✽✽ NOTICETo prevent internal damage to thetransaxle, never tow your vehicle fromthe rear (backwards) with all four tiresin contact with the surface.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud, sandor similar substances that prevent thevehicle from being driven out under itsown power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from

the front and the back of the tires.• Place a stone or wood under the tires.


186

TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

➀ Low Tire Pressure Telltale➁ TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehi-cle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with aTire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire caus-es the tire to overheat and can leadto tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is a separate tell-tale, which displays the symbol"TPMS" when illuminated. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intend-ed. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from function-ing properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction indicator after replacingone or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replace-ment or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to func-tion properly.

OMG045902N

➀ ➁

6 19


Low tire pressuretelltale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning telltale is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated. Immediatelyreduce your speed, avoid hard cor-nering and anticipate increased stop-ping distances. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible.Inflate the tires to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pil-lar outer panel. If you cannot reach aservice station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace thelow pressure tire with the compactspare tire. Because the compactspare tire is not equipped with a tirepressure sensor, the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator may go on and the LowTire Pressure telltale may go off afterrestarting and about 20 minutes ofcontinuous driving.

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunctionThe TPMS malfunction indicatorcomes on and stays on when there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If Front Left sen-sor fails, the TPMS malfunction indica-tor comes on, but if Front Right, RearLeft, or Rear Right tire is under-inflat-ed, the low tire pressure indicator maycome on with the TPMS malfunctionindicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of theproblem.

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

TPMS

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, thelow tire pressure telltale may beilluminated if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recom-mended tire inflation pressurein warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunction-ing because the decreased tem-perature leads to a proportionallowering of tire pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperatureis greatly higher or lower, youshould check the tire inflationpressure and adjust the tires tothe recommended tire inflationpressure.


206

✽✽ NOTICEThe TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if the vehicle ismoving around electric power sup-ply cable or radio transmitter suchas police stations, government andpublic offices, broadcasting stations,military installations, airports, ortransmitting tower, etc. which caninterfere with normal operation ofthe Tire Monitoring System(TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure indicator will come on.Have the flat tire repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible or replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire.

✽✽ NOTICENEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will haveto replace the tire pressure sensor. Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the low pressuretire with the compact spare tire, theTPMS malfunction indicator may illu-minate after restarting and about 20minutes of continuous drivingbecause the compact spare tire doesnot have a sensor.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflat-ed to the recommended pressureand installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tire pressure telltale will be extin-guished. If the low pressure andTPMS malfunction indicators are notextinguished after about 20 minutesof continuous driving, please visit anauthorized Kia dealer.You may not be able to identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Always usea good quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.Please note that a tire that is hot(from being driven) will have a higherpressure measurement than a tirethat is cold (from sitting stationary forat least 3 hours and driven less than1 mile during that 3 hour period).Allow the tire to cool before measur-ing the inflation pressure.

6 21


Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile in that 3 hour period.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use any tire sealant if yourvehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNING Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors such as nails or roaddebris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually and withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.

WARNING - ProtectingTPMS

Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.


226

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

The spare tire, jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe luggage compartment. Removethe luggage under tray out of the wayto reach this equipment.

Removing the spare tire Turn the tire hold-down wing boltcounterclockwise.Store the tire in the reverse order ofremoval.To prevent the spare tire and toolsfrom “rattling” while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

Important - use of compactspare tireyour vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

CAUTION - Compactspare

• You should drive carefullywhen the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

OMG065014 OMG065015

6 23


The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately 1inch (25 mm), which could result indamage to the vehicle.

• Do not take the vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compactspare.

• Do not use tire chains on this tire.Because of the smaller size, a tirechain will not fit properly.This coulddamage the vehicle and result inloss of the chain.

• This tire should not be installed onthe front axle if the vehicle must bedriven in snow or on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

CAUTION - Compactspare

This spare tire should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.


246

Changing tires Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

Tire replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transaxleor P (Park) with automatictransaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on level firm ground.If you cannot find a firm, levelplace off the road, call a tow-ing service company forassistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

1JBA6021

6 25


4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.

• It is recommended that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personshould remain in a vehicle thatis being jacked.

1JBA6504 OMG065016


266

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 1.2 in (30 mm).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

9. Remove the wheel lug nuts byturning them counterclockwise,then remove the wheel.

10. Mount the spare tire into positionand install the wheel lug nutswith the beveled edge inward.

11. Once the wheel lug nuts havebeen tightened, lower the vehiclefully to the ground and continue totighten the lug nuts until they arefully secured. Tighten the wheellug nuts firmly in a “star” pattern.If you are unsure of the tightnessof the wheel lug nuts, have themchecked at the nearest servicestation. The specified tighteningtorque is 65-79 lb•ft (9~11 kg•m,88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-ened wheel lug nuts could causebrake pedal vibration while brak-ing.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

OMG0650171JBA6025 OMG065018

6 27


To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

7

Maintenance services / 7-2Schedule 1 - normal maintenance / 7-3Schedule 2 - severe maintenance / 7-6Owner maintenance / 7-9Engine compartment / 7-11Engine oil / 7-13Engine cooling system / 7-14Brake fluid / 7-16Drive belts / 7-17Power steering / 7-17Automatic transaxle / 7-18Lubricants and fluids / 7-19Air cleaner / 7-20Climate control air filter / 7-21Wiper blades / 7-23Battery / 7-24

Tires and wheels / 7-27Bulb replacement / 7-39Lubricant specifications / 7-44Exterior care / 7-45Interior care / 7-47California perchlorate notice / 7-48

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an authorized Kia dealer performthis work.An authorized Kia dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kiaparts to service your vehicle properly. Forexpert advice and quality service, see anauthorized Kia dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

Owner’s responsibility Maintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibil-ity.You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Kia warranties.Detailed warranty information is providedin your Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual.Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.We recommend you have your vehiclemaintained and repaired by an author-ized Kia dealer.An authorized Kia dealer meets Kia'shigh service quality standards andreceives technical support from Kia inorder to provide you with a high level ofservice satisfaction.

Scheduled maintenance service If none of the following conditions areapplicable, then use Schedule 1 –Normal Maintenance.• Repeated short distance driving.• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.• Extensive use of brakes.• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.• Driving on rough or muddy roads.• Driving in mountainous areas.• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humidclimates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy citytraffic during hot weather above 90°F(32°C).

However, if any of the preceding condi-tions apply, follow Schedule 2 – SevereMaintenance.After 105 months or 105,000 miles(168,000 km) continue to follow the pre-scribed maintenance intervals.

7 3

Maintenance

SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEITEM

Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes firstMonths 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105(km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)

Drive belts (1) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

Manual transaxle fluid* I I I I I I I

Auto transaxle fluid* I I I I I I I

Engine timing belt 2.7 Engine I R I

Air cleaner element I I I R I I I R I I I R I I

Spark plugs (Iridium coated)

Water pump

Engine coolant (2) (3)

Valve clearance (4)

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change.* If equipped(1) The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.(2) Coolant level adjustment and leak check : Inspect regularly.(3) When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the

factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.(4) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.

Inspect when replacing the drive belt or timing belt

At first, replace at 60,000 miles or 60 months ;after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 monthsReplace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Replace every 100,000 miles or 10 years

Inspect every 60,000 miles or 48 months

Maintenance

47

SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)


MAINTENANCEITEM


Fuel filter R R

Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Vacuum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I IFuel tank air filter I R I R I R I

Battery condition I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I

Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on operating conditions

Parking brake I I I I I I I

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Drum brakes and linings* I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Exhaust pipe and muffler I I I I I I I

Brake/clutch* fluid I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R: Replace or change.* If equipped

7 5

Maintenance

SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)


MAINTENANCEITEM


Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I

Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I

Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on page 7-27

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I

All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

Air conditioner refrigerant* Inspect refrigerant amount annually

Air conditioner compressor* Inspect operation annually

Climate control air filter * R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R: Replace or change.L: Lubricate.* If equipped

Pressure

Tread wear

Maintenance

67

SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE


MAINTENANCEITEM

Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes firstMonths 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42Miles x 1,000 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42(km x 1,000) (5) (10) (15) (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (45) (50) (55) (60) (65) (70)

Drive belts (1) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Manual transaxle fluid* I I I I I R I

Auto transaxle fluid* I R I R

Engine timing belt 2.7 Engine I R I

Air cleaner element Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace

Spark plugs Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace

Water pump

Engine coolant (2) (3)

Valve clearance (4)

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change.* If equipped(1) The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.(2) Coolant level adjustment and leak check : Inspect regularly.(3) When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the

factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.(4) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.

At first, replace at 60,000 miles or 60 months ;after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months

Inspect when replacing the drive belt or timing belt

Inspect every 60,000 miles or 48 months

7 7

Maintenance

SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)


MAINTENANCEITEM

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R: Replace or change.* If equipped


Fuel filter R

Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Vacuum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I IFuel tank air filter I R I R

Battery condition I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on operating conditions

Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Drum brakes and linings* I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Exhaust pipe and muffler I I I I I I I

Brake/clutch* fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Maintenance

87

SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)


MAINTENANCEITEM


Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I

Drive shaft and boots Inspect every 7,500 miles or 6 months

Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on page 7-27

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I

All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

Air conditioner refrigerant* Inspect refrigerant amount annually

Air conditioner compressor* Inspect operation annually

Climate control air filter* Inspect every 3,000 miles and replace as needed

I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R: Replace or change.L: Lubricate.* If equipped

Pressure

Tread wear

7 9

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an authorized Kia dealer atthe frequencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check forstrange sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transaxle occurs, checkthe transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper bladeswith clean cloth dampened with wash-er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

WARNING - Radiationcoolant

Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure.This could cause burns orother serious injury.

Maintenance

107

At least once a year :• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.• Check the air conditioning system

before the warm weather season.• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anauthorized Kia dealer with special tools.

Improper owner maintenance duringthe warranty period may affect war-ranty coverage. For details, read theseparate Kia Warranty & ConsumerInformation Manual provided with thevehicle. If you're unsure about anyservicing or maintenance procedure,have it done by an Authorized KiaDealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured while per-forming some maintenance pro-cedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Working under the hood with theengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Always remove allloose or hanging clothing and alljewelry before working on theengine.

7 11

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OMG075001

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Radiator cap

8. Positive battery terminal

9. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

12. Power steering fluid reservoir

■■ 2.4L Gasoline Engine

Maintenance

127

OMG075002

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Radiator cap

8. Positive battery terminal

9. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

12. Power steering fluid reservoir

■■ 2.7L Gasoline Engine

7 13

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level. The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.Use only the specified engine oil. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

✽✽ NOTICEAlthough oil filters may have the sameexternal appearance, their internaldesigns differ significantly. These filtersare not interchangeable. To avoid poten-tial engine damage, use only the speci-fied filter. Consult an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.


Used engine oil may cause irritationor cancer of the skin if left in con-tact with the skin for prolongedperiods of time. Used engine oilcontains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory ani-mals. Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.OMG075003 OMG075004

Maintenance

147

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with year-round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an authorizedKia dealer for a cooling system inspec-tion.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and enginedamage and could result in seri-ous personal injury from escap-ing hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

OMG075005

7 15

Maintenance

Engine coolant• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in

the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure caus-ing serious injury.

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

OMG075006

Maintenance

167

BRAKE FLUID

Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake fluid, clean the area aroundthe reservoir cap thoroughly to preventbrake fluid contamination.If your vehicle is equipped with a manualtransaxle, brake fluid is used as clutchfluid.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake linings.If the fluid level is excessively low, havethe brake system checked by an author-ized Kia dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Never mix different types of fluid. ✽✽ NOTICEDo not allow brake fluid to contact thevehicle's body paint, as paint damagewill result. Brake fluid, which has beenexposed to open air for an extended timeshould never be used as its quality can-not be guaranteed. It should be thrownout. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.A few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake/clutch sys-tem can damage brake/clutch systemparts.

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brakefluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

OMG075007

7 17

Maintenance

DRIVE BELTSDrive belts should be checked periodical-ly for proper tension and replaced if nec-essary. At the same time, belts should beexamined for cracks, wear, fraying orother evidence of deterioration andreplaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to besure there is no interference between thebelts and other parts of the engine.If the belt is too loose, have it replaced byan authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the power steering fluidlevel With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel.

In the event the power steering systemrequires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• To avoid damage to the power steer-

ing pump, do not operate the vehiclefor prolonged periods with a lowpower steering fluid level.

• Never start the engine when the reser-voir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful thatdirt does not get into the tank.

• Insufficient fluid can result inincreased steering effort; excessivenoise may also be present as the steer-ing wheel is turned.

• The use of the non-specified fluidcould reduce the effectiveness of thepower steering wheel and cause dam-age to it.

Use only the specified power steeringfluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

Power steering hoseCheck the hoses and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage before driving thevehicle.

POWER STEERING (IF EQUIPPED)

OMG075008

Maintenance

187

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the automatic transaxlefluid level The automatic transaxle fluid levelshould be checked regularly.Keep the vehicle on the level ground withthe parking brake applied and check thefluid level according to the following pro-cedure.1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine is run-ning at normal idle speed.

2. After the transaxle is warmed up suffi-ciently (fluid temperature 158~176°F(70~80°C)), for example by 10 minutesusual driving, shift the selector leverthrough all positions then place theselector lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)position.

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”range on the level gauge. If the fluidlevel is lower, add the specified fluidfrom the fill hole. If the fluid level ishigher, drain the fluid from the drainhole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-dition (fluid temperature 68~86°F(20~30°C) add the fluid to “COLD” lineand then recheck the fluid levelaccording to the above step 2.

OMG075009 OMG075010

WARNING - Transaxle fluidThe transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at nor-mal operating temperature. Thismeans that the engine, radiator,radiator hose and exhaust systemetc., are very hot. Exercise greatcare not to burn yourself during thisprocedure.

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement of thevehicle, apply parking brake anddepress the brake pedal beforemoving the shift lever.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes transaxle

slippage. Overfilling can causefoaming, loss of fluid andtransaxle malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transaxle malfunc-tion and failure.

7 19

Maintenance

“COLD” scale is for reference onlyand should NOT be used to determinetransaxle fluid level.

New automatic transaxle fluid shouldbe red. The red dye is added so theassembly plant can identify it as auto-matic transaxle fluid and distinguish itfrom engine oil or antifreeze. The reddye, which is not an indicator of fluidquality, is not permanent. As the vehi-cle is driven, the automatic transaxlefluid will begin to look darker. Thecolor may eventually appear lightbrown.

✽✽ NOTICEHave an Authorized Kia dealer changethe automatic transaxle fluid accordingto the Scheduled Maintenance at thebeginning of this section.

Use only the specified automatictransaxle fluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that youcan check the level with a quick visualinspection.Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, such asdoor hinges, hood hinges, and locks,should be lubricated each time theengine oil is changed. Use a non-freez-ing lubricant on locks during cold weath-er.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor it's occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

OMG075011

Maintenance

207

Element cleaningThis element may be air cleaned orreplaced, depending on its condition.Unless it is very dirty, merely shake it toremove foreign particles. Each time thisfilter is inspected, wipe the inside of theair cleaner housing and cover with adamp cloth. If the vehicle is operated inextremely dusty or sandy areas, clean orreplace this element more often than atthe usual recommended intervals. Element replacement

A dry paper air cleaner filter is used. Itmust be replaced when necessary.1. Release the air cleaner filter cover

attaching clips and open the cover.2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner

housing with a clean, damp cloth.

3. Replace the air cleaner element. Werecommend that the air cleaner ele-ment be replaced with genuine Kiaparts.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attachingclips.

AIR CLEANER

OMG075012

OMG075013

OMG075014

OMG075015

7 21

Maintenance

Replace the element according to theScheduled Maintenance Section.If the vehicle is operated in extremelydusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-ment more often than the usual recom-mended intervals. (Refer to Schedule 2 -Severe Maintenance in this section.)

✽✽ NOTICE - Engine• Do not drive with the air cleaner ele-

ment removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner ele-ment, be careful that dust or dirt doesnot enter the air intake, or damagemay result.

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) are position is selected. If thishappens, have the climate control air fil-ter replaced by an Authorized KiaDealer.

The air filter should be replaced every10,000 miles (15,000 km). If the vehicleis operated in the severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for a longperiod, it should be inspected more fre-quently and replaced earlier. When youtry to replace the air filter by owner main-tenance, replace it performing the follow-ing procedure, and in this case, be care-ful to avoid damaging other components.CAUTION - Air cleaner

Operating the engine without the aircleaner may result in poor perform-ance, emission control malfunction,and/or engine damage.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

Maintenance

227

Filter replacement1. With the glove box open, remove the

stoppers on both sides and allow theglove box to hang freely on the hinges.

2. Remove the climate control air filtercover by pressing the clips on bothsides of the cover. Take care not todamage the clips.

3. Replace the climate control air filter.4. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

HNF2165

OMG075016

OMG075017

OMG075018

OMG075019

7 23

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES Wiper blade maintenance Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

✽✽ NOTICETo prevent damage to the wiper blades,do not use gasoline, kerosene, paintthinner, or other solvents on or nearthem.

Windshield wiper blade replace-ment When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

✽✽ NOTICETo prevent damage to the wiper arms orother components, do not attempt tomove the wipers manually.

✽✽ NOTICEThe use of a non-specified wiper bladecould result in wiper malfunction andfailure.

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiperblade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield, since it may chipor crack the windshield.

1LDA5023

Maintenance

247

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. Ifpossible, continue to applywater with a sponge orcloth until medical attentionis received.

If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feel apain or a burning sensation,get medical attention imme-diately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

(Continued)2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

7 25

Maintenance

For best battery service :• Keep the battery securely mounted.• Keep the top of the battery clean and

dry.• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

Items to be reset after the battery hasbeen discharged or the battery hasbeen disconnected.• Clock (See Chapter 3)• Climate control system

(See Chapter 4)• Audio (See Chapter 3)• Sunroof (See Chapter 3)PROPOSITION 65 WARN-

INGBattery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancerand reproductive harm. Batteriesalso contain other chemicals knownto the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to charge the bat-tery when the battery cables areconnected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

OMG075021

Maintenance

267

✽✽ NOTICE• Before performing maintenance or

recharging the battery, turn off allaccessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must beremoved first and installed last whenthe battery is disconnected.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, orflame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

7 27

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than one mile (1.6 km).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (10 psi (70kPa) or more) can lead to severeheat build-up, causing blowouts,tread separation and other tirefailures that can result in theloss of vehicle control leadingto severe injury or death. Thisrisk is much higher on hot daysand when driving for protractedperiods at high speeds.

OMG055004N

XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XX XXXX XX

XX XXXX XX

XX XXXX XX

X X X

XXX XXX

1MGN5900A

Maintenance

287

✽✽ NOTICE• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheeldeformation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greater pos-sibility of damage from road haz-ards.

✽✽ NOTICE• Warm tires normally exceed rec-

ommended cold tire pressures by 4to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do notrelease air from warm tires toadjust the pressure or the tires willbe underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve caps. Without the valvecap, dirt or moisture could get intothe valve core and cause air leak-age. If a valve cap is missing,install a new one as soon as possi-ble.

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tire failure.This couldresult in loss of vehicle controland potential injury.

WARNING - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than one mile (1.6km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

7 29

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern onlyfrom front to rear and not fromright to left.

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)CBGQ0707

WARNING• Do not use the temporary

spare tire for tire rotation• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

Maintenance

307

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

Compact spare tire replace-ment (if equipped)A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew Kia and should be mounted onthe same compact spare tire wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper wheel weights can dam-age your vehicle's aluminum wheels.Use only approved wheel weights.

1LDA5026

Tread wear indicator

7 31

Maintenance

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

WARNING - Replacingtires

• Driving on worn-out tires isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• Your vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide forsafe ride and handling capa-bility. Do not use a size andtype of tire and wheel that isdifferent from the one that isoriginally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehi-cle, which could lead to han-dling failure or rollover andserious injury. When replacingthe tires, be sure to equip allfour tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type,tread, brand and load-carryingcapacity.

(Continued)

(Continued)If you nevertheless decide toequip your vehicle with anytire/wheel combination notrecommended by Kia for offroad driving, you should notuse these tires for highwaydriving.

• The use of any other tire sizeor type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, stopping distance, bodyto tire clearance, snow tireclearance, and speedometerreliability.

• It is best to replace all fourtires at the same time. If that isnot possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handling char-acteristics, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, snowchain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim andbumper height.

Maintenance

327

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignement.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possiblity oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire sidewall labelingFederal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides the tire identifi-cation number (TIN) for safety stan-dard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of arecall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P205/60R16 92H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).16 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

7 33

Maintenance

92 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:6.5JX16

6.5 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tire size designa-tion on the sidewall of the tire. Thissymbol corresponds to that tire'sdesigned maximum safe operatingspeed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, basedon the manufacturing date, tirestrength and performance, declinewith age naturally (even unusedspare tires). Therefore, the tires(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1605 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2005.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)T 118 mph (190 km/h)H 130 mph (210 km/h)V 149 mph (240 km/h)Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

347

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading The following information relates tothe tire grading system developed bythe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) for gradingtires by tread wear, traction and tem-perature performance.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on Kia vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remainingtread, it is recommended thattires generally be replaced aftersix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading conditionscan accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in sudden tirefailure, which could lead to aloss of control and an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

7 35

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tires todegenerate and reduce tires life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tires failure. Grade C corre-sponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger vehicle tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Aand B represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by the law.

Tire terminology and defini-tionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

Maintenance

367

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 150pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

7 37

Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Maintenance

387

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Tire chainsTire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the drive wheels (frontwheel).Be sure that the chains are installedin accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

✽✽ NOTICE• If you have noise caused by chains

contacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retight-en the chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

• Do not use tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels.In unavoidable circumstance, usea wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 15mm toprevent damage to the chain’sconnection.

✽✽ NOTICE• If you hear noise caused by chains

contacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retight-en the chains after driving 0.3 ~0.6 miles (0.5 ~ 1.0 km).

WARNING - Snow or ice • When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive atless than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

7 39

Maintenance

BULB REPLACEMENT

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

✽✽ NOTICEBe sure to replace the burned-out bulbwith one of the same wattage rating.Otherwise, it may cause damage to thefuse or electric wiring system.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you don’t have necessary tools, thecorrect bulbs and the expertise, consultan authorized Kia dealer. In many cases,it is difficult to replace vehicle lightbulbs because other parts of the vehiclemust be removed before you can get tothe bulb. This is especially true if youhave to remove the front bumper to getto the bulb(s). Removing/installing the front bumperor bumper hardware improperly canresult in damage to the vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition is caused bythe temperature difference between thelamp inside and outside. This is similarto the condensation on your windowsinside your vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem with yourvehicle. If the water leaks into the lampbulb circuitry, have the vehicle checkedby an authorized Kia dealer.

Headlight bulb replacement (1) Headlight (High), Position light(2) Headlight (Low)(3) Front turn signal light(4) Front fog light (if equipped)

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the lights, firm-ly apply the parking brake, ensurethat the ignition switch is turned tothe “LOCK” position and turn offthe lights to avoid sudden move-ment of the vehicle and burningyour fingers or receiving an electricshock.

OMG075022

Maintenance

407

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.3. Disconnect the headlight bulb assem-

bly by turning it counterclockwise.4. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.5. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

(Continued)• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediatelyand carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cooldown before handling it.

WARNING - Halogen bulbs• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flyingpieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,and avoid scratches and abra-sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoidcontact with liquids. Never touchthe glass with bare hands.Residual oil may cause the bulbto overheat and burst when lit. Abulb should be operated onlywhen installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

G270A03ON OMG075038N

(Low) (Low)

7 41

Maintenance

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retainingwire by pressing on the lower portionof the wire, then pushing it towards theoutside of the vehicle. Maintain lightpressure on the wire and allow thewire to raise upward to its fullyreleased position.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snapthe headlight bulb retaining wire intoposition by aligning the wire with thegroove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-ing it clockwise.

Front turn signal/position lightbulb replacementIf the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorized Kiadealer.

Front fog light bulb replacementIf the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorized Kiadealer.

G270A03O

OMG075038

(High)

(High)

Maintenance

427

Interior bulb replacement1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior lighthousing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap thelens into place.

Rear combination light bulbreplacement(1) Rear turn signal light(2) Stop and tail light(3) Position light(4) Back-up light1. Open the trunk lid or rear hatch.

OMG075023

OMG075024

OMG075025

Trunk room lamp

Front map lamp

Center dome lamp

CAUTION - Interior lightsPrior to working on the InteriorLights, ensure that the “OFF” but-ton is depressed to avoid burningyour fingers or receiving an electricshock.

OMG075027D

14 3 2

7 43

Maintenance

2. Remove the service cover by turning theplastic screw counterclockwise andremoving the cover.

3. Remove the socket from the assemblyby turning the socket counterclockwiseuntil the tabs on the socket align withthe slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it until thetabs on the bulb align with the slots inthe socket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locksinto place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly byaligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Push the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

7. Replace the service cover and tightenthe screws.

OMG075028

OMG075030

Maintenance

447

LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONSRecommended lubricants To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance anddurability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correctlubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results inimproved fuel economy.Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available.Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fueleconomy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to over-come engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult tomeasure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offersignificant cost and energy savings.

Recommended SAE viscosity number

✽✽ NOTICEAlways be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drainplug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and whenthe vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug anddipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering theengine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economyand cold weather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower vis-cosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils arerequired for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils ofany viscosity other than those recommended could result inengine damage.When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature yourvehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceedto select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in yourvehicle.

Lubricant Classification

API Service SJ, SL or above,

ILSAC GF-3 or above

Manual transaxle fluidAPI Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill-for-life)

DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III, or other brands meeting the SP-IIIspecification approved by Kia MotorsCorp.

Power steering fluid PSF-IV

Brake/Clutch fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Engine oil *¹

Automatic transaxlefluid

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscositygrade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3).

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

7 45

Maintenance

EXTERIOR CARE Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use strong soap, chemical deter-gents or hot water, and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight or when thebody of the vehicle is warm.

✽✽ NOTICE• Water washing in the engine compart-

ment including high pressure waterwashing may cause the failure of elec-trical circuits located in the enginecompartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/elec-tronic components inside the vehicleas this may damage them.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

OJB037800

Maintenance

467

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

✽✽ NOTICE• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with

a dry cloth will scratch the finish.• Do not use steel wool, abrasive clean-

ers, or strong detergents containinghighly alkaline or caustic agents onchrome-plated or anodized aluminumparts. This may result in damage tothe protective coating and cause dis-coloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month, after off-roaddriving and at the end of each winter. Payspecial attention to these areas becauseit is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it. Thelower edges of doors, rocker panels, andframe members have drain holes thatshould not be allowed to clog with dirt;trapped water in these areas can causerusting.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

7 47

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It maydamage and corrode the aluminumwheels coated with a clear protectivefinish.

INTERIOR CARE Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions that follow forthe proper way to clean vinyl.

✽✽ NOTICENever allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/electron-ic components inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-rior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

✽✽ NOTICEUsing anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affect thefabric’s appearance and fire-resistantproperties.

Maintenance

487

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow thedirections on the glass cleaner container.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not scrape or scratch the inside ofthe rear window. This may result indamage to the rear window defrostergrid.

Perchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-ardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, such asairbag inflators, seatbelt pretensionersand keyless remote entry batteries, mustbe disposed of according to Title 22California Code of Regulations Section67384.10 (a).

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

8

Specifications / 8-2

Specifications

Specifications

28

Item in (mm)

Overall length 186.4 (4,735)

Overall width 71.1 (1,805)

Overall height 58.3 (1,480)

Front tread 61.5 (1,563)

Rear tread 61.1 (1,552)

Wheelbase 107.1 (2,720)

SPECIFICATIONSThe specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time of printing, Kiareserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for moreprecise and more up-to-date information.

Dimensions

Tires

Item Recommended Cold TireWheel lug nut torque

Tire WheelInflation Pressure

psi (kPa) lb·ft (kg·m, N·m)

P205/60 R 16 6.5J×16 30 (210) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)

P215/50 R 17 6.5J×17 32 (220) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)

Compact spare tire

T125/80D16 60 (420) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)

8 3

Specifications

Engine

Item 2.4L Engine 2.7L Engine

BoreXStroke 3.46 in X 3.82 in (88 mm X 97 mm) 3.41 in X 2.95 in (86.7 mm X 75 mm)

Displacement 143.90 cu.in (2359 cc) 1621 cu.in (2656 cc)

Compression Ratio 10.5:1 10.4:1

Item 2.4L Engine 2.7L Engine

Battery 12V / 68AH (20HR) 12V / 68AH (20HR)

Generator 13.5V / 110A 13.5V / 130A

Starter 12V-1.2kW 12V-1.2kW

Gap 0.039 ~ 0.043 in (1.0 mm ~ 1.1 mm) 0.039 ~ 0.043 in (1.0 mm ~ 1.1 mm)

Iridium coated SK16PR-A11 ILFR5B-11

SparkPlug Spec.

Electrical system

WeightsRefer to the compliance label describing GVWR & GAWR weights attached to your vehicle.(see page 5-22, Label information)

Specifications

48

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers in chapter 7.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 4.5 US qt. (4.3 l) API Service SJ, SL or above,

(with filter change) 4.7 US qt. (4.5 l) ILSAC GF-3 or above

Manual transaxle fluid 2.0 US qt. (1.9 l) API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)

DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III

Automatic transaxle fluid 10.0 US qt. (9.5 l) or other brands meeting the SP-III specification

approved by Kia Motors Corp.

Power steering 0.8 US qt. ( 0.8 l) PSF-IV

Coolant 6.8~7.3 US qt. (6.4~6.9 l)

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator8.7~8.8 US qt. (8.2~8.3 l)

Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 16.4 US gal (62 l) Unleaded gasoline with AKI 87 or higher

2.4L Engine

2.7L Engine

2.4L Engine

2.7L Engine

Capacities

8 5

Specifications

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb No.Headlights (Low) 55 H7 or H11BHeadlights (High) 55 H1Front turn signal lights 21Position lights 5Side marker (if equipped) 5Front fog lights (if equipped) 51Stop and tail lights 21/5Rear turn signal lights 21Back-up lights 18 -High mounted stop light (if equipped) 18License plate lights 5Front map lamp 10Center dome lamp 10Trunk room lamp 5Door courtesy lamps (if equipped) 5Foot lamp 5Vanity mirror lamps 5

Light bulbs

9

Toll free consumer assistance / 9-2Emergency roadside assistance / 9-2Trip interruption / 9-3Registering your vehicle in a foreign country / 9-3Electrical equipment / 9-4Reporting safety defects / 9-5Purchasing factory authorized manuals / 9-6

Consumer assistance (U.S. only)

Consumer assistance

29

CONSUMER ASSISTANCERoadside Assistance is provided on all new current model KiaVehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the first retailbuyer or otherwise put into use (in-service date), whichever isearlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever isearlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set forthin your Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Guide.KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other bene-fits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, the claimsand/or service requests are excessive in frequency or type ofoccurrence.

Toll Free Consumer AssistanceKia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessibleby dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).For more information regarding assistance available, pleaserefer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual.

Emergency Roadside AssistanceKia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).Please note that you must provide your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. TheVIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the driver’sside, on the door jamb of the driver’s door, your vehicle’s regis-tration or proof of insurance card.

Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistanceproviders. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a bat-tery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia RoadsideAssistance Representative will dispatch (at no charge to you)someone to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tirewith your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to allow youto proceed to your destination. We have access to a network ofover 10,000 locksmiths to help you should you become lockedout of your Kia, also at no charge.In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicleundriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s RoadsideAssistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicleto the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehi-cle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service. In theevent that Kia does not have a dealer or an alternative servicelocation available in a particular location, Kia will work with areputable local service facility to ensure that you receive promptservice. Warranty repairs are performed at no cost.

✽✽ NOTICERoadside Assistance benefits are not available for any Kiavehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “salvage” titleor similar “branded” title under any state’s law or has beendeclared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institutionor insurance company.

9 3

Consumer assistance

Trip InterruptionTrip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event thata warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 milesfrom your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours tocomplete. Reasonable reimbursement is included for meals,lodging, or rental car expenses.Trip interruption coverage is lim-ited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit perincident. You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Centerto obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia RoadsideAssistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption bene-fits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements.Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by yourinsurance company or other providers are not eligible for reim-bursement.Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kia’sTrip Interruption Policy.

Registering Your Vehicle in a Foreign CountryIf you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, youshould confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that coun-try. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreigncountry, you may experience the following problems and shouldtherefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable. If other

than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to theengine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related partswhich may not be covered under your New Vehicle EmissionsLimited Warranty.

2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave thecountry in which you purchased your Kia as a new and reg-ister it in another country, problems arising from the use offuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufac-turer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be mar-keted in the new country of registration, parts, servicing tech-niques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehi-cle may be unavailable.Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical speci-fications required by the government may vary enough fromthe country of purchase to cause additional problems.

3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area inwhich you plan to register your vehicle. You may additionallyexperience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign countryfor any number of reasons.

Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for problems thatresult from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside ofthe United States.

Consumer assistance

49

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTThe electrical system of your vehicle is designed to performunder all reasonably expected operating conditions. However,before any additional electrical equipment is installed in yourvehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer, in order to ensurethat you do not void your warranty.Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed,may adversely affect the operation of your vehicle, includingsuch systems as the engine control system, the audio systemand the electrical charging system and thus potentially void allor part of your warranty.We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur orfor any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components orsystems that may result from the installation of additional elec-trical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for instal-lation by, Kia.

Installation of a Mobile Two-Way Radio SystemIf a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if anexcessively powerful type of system is used, other electronicsystems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to yourvehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the prop-er equipment and installation.

Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet orexceed all applicable safety standards.

9 5

Consumer assistance

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and fol-low all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the infor-mation under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and"WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regardingthe operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects pleasecontact your Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line asbelow:

National Consumer Affairs ManagerKia Motors America, Inc.P.O. Box 52410Irvine, CA 92619-24101-800-333-4Kia (4542)

If you believe your vehicle has a defect which couldcause an accident or could cause injury or death, youshould inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) immediately, in addition to noti-fying Kia Motors America, Inc.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation. A recall and remedy campaign may beordered if a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or Kia MotorsAmerica, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other infor-mation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safer-car.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Consumer assistance

69

PURCHASING FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)The following publications can be ordered by calling the toll-freephone number 1-866-542-6268. Publications for the previousyears may also be obtained by calling the same number.

Valid only for sales within the U.S.. Canadian owners shouldcontact their Authorized Kia Dealer.

Service manual:This manual covers maintenance and recommended proce-dures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for mostmechanically-inclined owners to understand.

Electrical troubleshooting manual:This manual complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit inyour vehicle.

Owner’s manual:This manual describes the overall features and operating pro-cedures for the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-866-542-6268(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. - 6:00 P.M. ESTMINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

PublicationPart Number Form Description

2007 Kia OPTIMAService Repair Manual

2007 Kia OPTIMAElectrical Troubleshooting Manual

2007 Kia OPTIMAOwner’s Manual

UT070 PS 010

UT070 PS 011

UT070 PS 013

10Index

Index

210

Air bags-advanced supplemental restraint system ········3-47Air bag warning light ·················································3-66Curtain air bag····························································3-58Driver’s air bag···························································3-50Front passenger’s air bag ···········································3-51Occupant classification system ··································3-51Side air bag·································································3-57

Air cleaner ·····································································7-20Antenna··········································································3-97Audio remote control·····················································3-98Audio system ·································································3-99Automatic climate control system ·································4-56 Automatic transaxle················································4-6, 7-18

Ignition key interlock system·······································4-9Shift lock system ··························································4-9Sports mode··································································4-8Transaxle ranges···························································4-7

Battery············································································7-24Before driving··································································5-4Brake fluid ·····································································7-16Brake system··································································4-10

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ···································4-14Parking brake······························································4-12Power adjustable pedals ·············································4-11Power brakes ······························································4-10

Bulb replacement ···························································7-39

California perchlorate notice ········································ 7-48 Climate control air filter ················································7-21Climate control system

Automatic climate control system······························4-56 Manual climate control system ··································4-49

Compass·········································································4-36Cruise control system ····················································4-18

Defroster ········································································4-48Door locks········································································3-9

Central door lock switch ············································3-11Rear door child safety lock ········································3-12

Drive belts······································································7-17

Electrical circuit protection ·············································6-6Electrical equipment ························································9-4Electronic stability control·············································4-21Emergency roadside assistance········································9-2Emergency starting ··························································6-3Emission control system··················································5-2Engine compartment···············································2-4, 7-11Engine cooling system···················································7-14Engine oil·······································································7-13Exterior care···································································7-45

A

B

C

D

E

10 3

Index

Fuel filler lid ··································································3-71Fuel requirements ····························································5-2Fuses ················································································6-6

Gauges ···········································································4-25Engine temperature gauge··········································4-26Fuel gauge ··································································4-26Instrument panel illumination ····································4-29Odometer ····································································4-25Speedometer ·······························································4-25Tachometer ·································································4-25Trip computer ·····························································4-26Trip odometer ·····························································4-25

Hazard warning flasher··················································4-48HOMELINK® wireless control system ························3-79Hood···············································································3-70How to use this manual ···················································1-2

If you have a flat tire ·····················································6-22Changing tires ····························································6-24

Ignition switch ·································································4-2Immobilizer system ·························································3-8

Instrument cluster ··························································4-24Instrument panel overview ··············································2-3Interior care····································································7-47Interior features······························································3-90

Ashtray ·······································································3-90Cigarette lighter··························································3-90Cup holder ··································································3-91Digital clock ·······························································3-93Power socket ······························································3-92Sunvisor······································································3-92

Interior lights ·································································3-87Interior overview ·····························································2-2

Keys ·················································································3-2

Label information ··························································5-22Lighting··········································································4-42Lubricant specifications·················································7-44Lubricants and fluids ·····················································7-19Luggage net ···································································3-96

Maintenance services·······················································7-2Schedule 1 - normal maintenance ································7-3Schedule 2 - severe maintenance ·································7-6

Manual climate control system······································4-49

K

L

M

F

G

H

I

Index

410

Manual transaxle······························································4-4Mirrors ···········································································3-74

Inside rearview mirror················································3-76Outside rearview mirror ·············································3-74

Overheating······································································6-2Owner maintenance ·························································7-9

Power steering ·······························································7-17Purchasing factory authorized manuals···························9-6

Rear parking assist system·············································4-39Registering your vehicle in a foreign country·················9-3Remote keyless entry·······················································3-4Reporting safety defects ··················································9-5Road warning···································································6-2

Safety belts·····································································3-273 point rear center belt ···············································3-35Lap/shoulder belt························································3-32Pre-tensioner safety belt ·············································3-27Safety belt warning light and chime ··························3-31

Schedule - maintenanceSchedule 1 - normal maintenance ································7-3

Schedule 2 - severe maintenance ·································7-6Seat·················································································3-17

Armrest - rear center ··················································3-26Front seat adjustment – manual ·································3-18Front seat adjustment – electric ·································3-20Headrest······································································3-22Rear seat adjustment ··················································3-23Warming the front seat ···············································3-21

Special driving conditions ···············································5-6Driving at night ····························································5-7Driving in the rain ························································5-7Hazardous driving conditions ······································5-6Winter driving ······························································5-7

Specifications···································································8-2Starting the engine ···························································4-3Steering wheel································································4-16Storage compartment ·····················································3-88

Center console storage ···············································3-88Glove box ···································································3-89Multi box ····································································3-88Sunglass holder ··························································3-89

Suggestions for economical operation·····························5-5Sunroof···········································································3-94

Theft-alarm system ··························································3-6Tires and wheels ····························································7-27Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS)····················6-18Toll free assistance···························································9-2Towing ···········································································6-13

T

O

P

R

S

10 5

Index

Trailer towing ································································5-16Trip interruption·······························································9-3Trunk··············································································3-68

Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-2Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ············1-3Vehicle load limit···························································5-10

Compliance label························································5-13Tire and loading information label·····························5-10

Warnings and indicators ················································4-30Weight of the vehicle ·····················································5-15Window··········································································3-13

Power window lock switch ········································3-16Windshield defrosting and defogging····························4-64Wiper blades ··································································7-23Wipers and washers ·······················································4-46

V

W

2007 KIA Optima

Documents

Transcript of 2007 KIA Optima